Home

- Power Logic

1. Modbus Status Word Address Bit Address Access Function Format Enabled Sepam Check Word 100 1000 R 3 4 or 1 2 7 X TS1 TS16 101 1010 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS17 TS32 102 1020 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS33 TS48 103 1030 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS49 TS64 104 1040 R 3 4 or 1 2 B Logic Inputs 105 1050 R 3 4 or 1 2 B Measurement Zone S20 S23 T20 T23 and M20 types Modbus Measurements Word Address Access Function Format Unit Enabled la Phase Current Gain x 1 106 Read 3 4 16NS 0 1A b Phase Current Gain x 1 107 Read 3 4 16NS 0 1A Ic Phase Current Gain x 1 108 Read 3 4 16NS 0 1A r Residual Current Gain x 1 109 Read 3 4 16NS 0 1A la Average Phase Current x 1 10A Read 3 4 16NS 0 1A b Average Phase Current x 1 10B Read 3 4 16NS 0 1A Ic Average Phase Current x 1 10C Read 3 4 16NS 0 1A la Phase Current Gain x 10 10D Read 3 4 16NS 1A b Phase Current Gain x 10 10E Read 3 4 16NS 1A Ic Phase Current Gain x 10 10F Read 3 4 16NS 1A r Residual Current Gain x 10 110F Read 3 4 16NS 1A la Average Phase Current x10 111 Read 3 4 16NS 1A b Average Phase Current x10 112 Read 3 4 16NS 1A Ic Average Phase Current x10 113 Read 3 4 16NS 1A la Peak Demand Phase Current 114 Read 3 4 16NS 1A b Peak Demand Phase Current 118 Read 3 4 16NS 1A Ic Peak Demand Phase Current 116 Read 3 4 16NS 1A Reserved 117 Read 3 4 Trip la Tripping Current 118 Read 3 4 16NS 10A Tri
2. Xxxxl5A 3CTs 67 Trip Dir with Line selected and CT common toward Load as shown e i B6 ee E qp B5 i i B3 e 52 Test ke ee ee ee ee ee a En 11 Sepam 11 Sepam A Test 11 Sepam p Sw SER20 SER40 rowo ooie Sw SER20 PowerLogic T BE B21 or 22 ALL H H B21 or22 CM or PM j RERUM 2VT s a 3VT s il il il U i u b 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider dp Electric 63230 216 208C1 76 im T oQ ON D o Qo wo pe c oO oc On oO xg 20 Mm o o He 5 ge QO Control and Monitoring Functions BREAKER DC CONTROL USING SEPAM SERIES 20 40 CLOSE CIRCUIT O TRIP CIRCUIT 0 A FU FU r l i2 c PREXT EXT I ai secs RMT CONT LCONT iscsi 701 112 111 Pw RMT i TOM i c CLOSE TINPUT TINPUT XXGIL XXRIL T T i1 5 Tip sl Kp Sup TRIP i Close if used Closed M2 CB I L3 if used ose Open A2 aire i oil Suprv s i TCS A17 l I eee A7 E 02 ac BcS 1 E DC A8 Block EU Lo CONTROL i Close ug Jesi POWER if used EE gio c o 3 E Om sD prn Xo LES E
3. Setting 15 60 V p Accuracy 2 Pick Up Drop Out Ratio 103 2 5 Resolution 1 Time Delay Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Characteristics Times Operating Time pick up lt 55 ms Overshoot Time lt 35 ms Reset Time 35 ms 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 29 ectric Protection Functions Remanent Undervoltage ANSI Code 27H Operation This single phase protection m Picks up when the Vab phase to phase voltage is less than the Vs set point m includes a definite time delay Block Diagram T 0 Vab V Vs 1 PTime Delayed Output or Van MT10875 Pick Up Signal Characteristics VLS Set Point Setting 5 100 Vj p Accuracy 1 2 or 0 005 Vi p Resolution 1 Drop Out Pick Up Ratio 103 2 5 Time Delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Characteristic Times Operation Time lt 40 ms Overshoot Time lt 20 ms Reset Time 30 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 30 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Phase to Neutral Undervoltage ANSI Code 27N Operation This 3 phase protection m Picks up when one of the 3 phase to neutral voltages drops below
4. Architecture for Internal Synchronization via the Communication Network 104 63230 216 208C1 Time Tagging of Events Synchronization Sepam accommodates two synchronization modes m Internal via the Network Synchronization mode by the broadcasting of a time message frame via the communication network slave number 0 is used for broadcasting m External Synchronization mode via a logic input selected at commissioning via SFT2841 Internal Synchronization via the Network Mode The time message frame is used for both time setting and synchronization of Sepam In this case it must be sent regularly at brief intervals between 10 60 s in order for synchronous time to be obtained The Sepam relay s internal clock is reset each time a new time frame is received and synchronization is maintained if the difference in synchronism is less than 100 milliseconds With internal synchronization via the network accuracy is linked to the master and its mastery of time frame transmission in the communication network The Sepam relay is synchronized without delay at the end of the receipt of the frame The time is changed by sending a frame to Sepam with the new date and time Then Sepam switches to a transitional non synchronous status When in synchronous status if no time message is received for 200 seconds the appearance of the not synchronous event is triggered Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All
5. 1 70 mm 2 8 in with CCA77x Cord Connected 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved MET1482 Temperature Sensor Module Function The MET1482 module can be used to connect 8 temperature sensors RTDs of the same type m Pt100 Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs according to parameter setting m 3 wire temperature sensors m A single module for each Sepam Series 20 base unit to be connected by one of the CCA770 2 ft 0 6 m CCA772 6 6 ft 2 m or CCA774 13 1 ft 4 m cords m 2 modules for each Sepam Series 40 or Series 80 base unit to be connected by CCA770 2 ft 0 6 m CCA772 6 6 ft 2 m or CCA774 13 1 ft 4 m cords The temperature measurement e g in a transformer or motor winding is utilized by the following protection functions m Thermal overload to take ambient temperature into account m Temperature monitoring Characteristics Weight 0 441 Ib 0 2 kg Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Operating Temperature 13 to 158 F 25 to 470 C Environmental Characteristics Same Characteristics as Sepam Base Units Isolation from Ground None None Current Injected in RTD 4 mA 4 mA Description and Dimensions A Terminal block for RTDs 1 4 B Terminal block for RTDs 5 8 ba RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord according to application Grounding terminal 1 Jumper
6. Function Code Relay Number The content of the address 2080h may be read using a Modbus read word function 3 The function code field may have the following values m 01h to 99h BCD encoding for protection functions The relay number field is used as follows m For protection it indicates the relay involved varying from 1 to N N being the maximum number of relays available in the Sepam m When only one relay is available this number field is not controlled Exception Replies In addition to the usual cases Sepam can send Modbus type 07 exception replies not acknowledged if another remote reading request is being processed Reply Frame The reply sent back by the Sepam fits into a zone containing a maximum of 125 words at the address 2000h which is composed the following 2000h 207Ch B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 BO8 B07 BO6 BOS B04 BOS BO2 BO1 BOO Function Code Relay Number Settings This zone is read by a read word operation function 3 at the address 2000h The length of the exchange may include m The first word only validity test m The maximum size of the zone 125 mots m The usable size of the zone determined by the function being addressed However reading must always begin at the first word in the zone any other address triggers an exception reply incorrect address The first
7. Range 0 65535 kA Unit Primary kA Accuracy 1 10 Number of Operations Range 0 65535 1 At In in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 208C1 23 D Electric Switchgear Diagnosis Functions 24 63230 216 208C1 Operating Time amp Charging Time Operating Time Operation This function gives the opening operating time of a breaking device and the status of the device s open position contact connected to the 111 input The function is blocked when the input is set for AC voltage Note The value is saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurement can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced user machine interface UMI by pressing the amp key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link 1 Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information 2 Optional MES114 MES114E or MES114F modules Characteristics Measurement Range 20 100 Unit ms Accuracy Typically x1 ms Display Format 3 Significant Digits Charging Time Operation This function gives the breaking device operating mechanism s charging time determined by the device closed position status change contact and the end of charging contact connected to the Sepam 112 and 124 Note The value is saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurement can be accessed via m The
8. DNP3 u L Power Supply DC 24 48 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 100 240 V AC AC 110 220 V AC 110 220 V AC with Adapter See Details on Page 166 168 168 See EGX100 Manual See EGX400 Manual Schneider 156 63230 216 208C1 D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE51659 Installation Communication Interface Connection CCA612 Connection Cord Plugging into a Sepam Relay Cord used to connect a communication interface to a Sepam base unit m Length 9 8 ft 3 m m Fitted with 2 green RJ45 plugs Sepam Series 20 and Sepam Series 40 Sepam Series 80 DE51660 ACE937 CCA612 ACE959 Sepam Series 20 and Sepam Series 40 1 Communication Port Sepam Series 80 2 Communication Ports Connection to the Communication Network RS485 Medium 1 Shielded Twisted Pair 2 Shielded Twisted Pairs Distributed Power Supply 1 Shielded Twisted Pair 1 Shielded Twisted Pair Shielding Tinned copper braid coverage gt 65 Characteristic Impedance 120 O Gauge AWG 24 Resistance per unit Length lt 62 1 Q mi 100 Q km Capacitance Between Conductors 18 3 pF ft 60 pF m Capacitance Between 30 5 pF ft 100 pF m Conductor and Shielding Maximum Length 4270 ft 1300 m Fiber Type Graded Index Multimode Silica Wavelength 820 nm Invisible Infrared Type of Connector ST BFOC Bayonet Fiber Optic Connector Fiber Optic Numerical Maximum Minimum Optical Ma
9. 1 CT common x zei RGR SSS aa aaa j D B5 E6 toward load Test 11 Sepam PowerLogic Test i n bog m as shown Sw SER2040 CMorPM Sw i Be ni ES ii S horting TB 1 Fog Lq B4 AT DS CR th e M I E m X e t SEPAM Series 20 40 APPLICATIONS REPRESENTED acts 4 i A B5 XXxxx 5A T E i Zone Characteristics Application i i 5 i i i iB O C Protection Metering Series 20 Series 40 T od AL BS Feeder Non Dir O C I 23 i t Non Dir o c 1 V P E S40 e d LgB8 5A Dir Grd O C 1 V P E S41 T 7 Dir Ph amp Grd O C I V P E S42 E B7 1A Motor Non Dir O C I M20 B DEE EI NM Dir Grd O C 1 V P E M41 1B8 5A Transformer Non Dir O C I T23 q puc DEI IT QI ME 1 Non Dir O C 1 V P E T40 CT 187 1A Dir Ph amp Grd O C I V P E T42 se Tir i Tun T Generator Non Dir O C 1 V P E G40 Bus Volt Freq v B21 zero sequence CT ALT GND FAULT CKT 2 005A Relay Volt Freq dF dt v B22 M Seri ERN vat Note Typical Catalog Number for S42 use SP1S42A Or 40 ALL NOTES a b c 1 IF 2 VT s connect a b c to Sepam Series 40 at E1 E2 E3 the wrong phase sequence will cause Rotation alarm and 47 Neg Seq O V operation 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider dp Electric 63230 216 208C1 74 Circuit Breaker Contactor Control AC Main 3 Line IEC Typical Control and Monitoring Functions SEPAM SERIES 20 40 AC MAIN 3 LIN
10. to DUREE 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1 A 5 A Current Transformers CCA630 CCA634 Connector Function The current transformers 1 A or 5 A are connected to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector on the rear panel of the Sepam relay with m The CCA630 connector used to connect 3 phase current transformers to Sepam relays m The CCA634 connector used to connect 3 phase current transformers and a residual current transformer to Sepam relays The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors contain interposing ring CTs with through primaries which ensure impedance matching and isolation between the 1 A or5 A circuits and Sepam relays when measuring phase and residual currents A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m To remove current inputs to the Sepam unit unplug the CCA630 or CCA634 connector without disconnecting the wires from it The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors ensure continuity of the current transformer secondary circuits m Before disconnec
11. m The current setting Is which corresponds to the vertical asymptote of the curve m The time delay T which corresponds to the operation time for 10 Is These three settings are made in the following order type current Is and time delay T Changing the time delay T setting by x changes all of the operation times in the curve by x DE50666 1 12 10 20 lg Inverse Definite Minimum Time Protection Principle Note The tripping time for l Is values less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve selected Name of Curve Type Standard Inverse Time SIT 1 2 Very Inverse Time VIT or LTI 12 Extremely Inverse Time EIT 1 2 Ultra Inverse Time UIT 1 2 RI Curve 1 IEC Inverse Time SIT A IEC Very Inverse Time VIT or LTI B IEC Extremely Inverse Time EIT C IEEE Moderately Inverse IEC D IEEE Very Inverse IEC E IEEE Extremely Inverse IEC F IAC Inverse IAC Very Inverse IAC Vxtremely Inverse m When the monitored value is more than 20 times the set point the tripping time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point m f the monitored value exceeds the measurement capacity of Sepam relay 40 IN for the phase current channels 20 Inr for the residual current channels the tripping time is limited to the value corresponding to the largest measurable value 40 IN or 20 INr Schneider 2007 Schneide
12. 3 According to parameter settings and presence of an additional MES114 module TD Xs BI Command SE TD Xs e g Radial distribution with use of the Sepam relay zone selective interlocking system With this type of system time delays are set in accordance with the device to be protected without consideration of the discrimination aspect 78 63230 216 208C1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE50375 DE50376 Control and Monitoring Zone Selective Interlocking Functions BI Transmission ANSI Code 68 Block Diagram Sepam S20 S23 T20 and T23 Output Oxx 0 BI Transmission Overcurrent Inst Relay 1 Group A Inst Relay 2 Group A To BI Transmission Ground Fault Inst Relay 1 Group A Inst Relay 2 Group A Blocking of BI Transmission If Fault Is Not Cleared BI Receipt Time Delay Settings for Time Based Discrimination Overcurrent Time Time Delayed Relay 1 Group B Time Delayed Relay 2 Group B Time Delayed Relay 1 Group B Tripping 01 Time Delayed Relay 2 Group B Time Delay Settings for ZSI Overcurrent Logic Discrimination Time Delayed Relay 1 Group A Time Delayed Relay 2 Group A Ground Fault Logic Discrim Ground Fault Time Time Delayed Relay 1 Group A Time Delayed Relay 2 Group A OO Log Input 113 BI
13. AWG 24 12 W 2 wires with cross section 0 00003 0 0016 in 0 2 1 mm AWG 24 18 Wiring Precautions m Shielded cables are preferable m Use tinned copper braid to connect the shielding at least at the MSA141 end 63230 216 208C1 153 D Electric PE50127 Installation DSM303 remote advanced UMI module 154 63230 216 208C1 DSM303 Remote Advanced UMI Module Function When associated with a Sepam relay that does not have its own advanced user machine interface the DSM303 offers all the functions available on a Sepam integrated advanced UMI The DSM303 can be installed on the front panel of the cubicle in the most suitable operating location m Reduced depth lt 1 2 in 30 mm m single module for each Sepam to be connected by one of the CCA772 6 6 ft 2 m or CCA774 13 1 ft 4 m cords The module cannot be connected to Sepam units with integrated advanced UMIs Characteristics Weight 0 661 Ib 0 3 kg Assembly Flush Mounted Operating Temperature 13 to 4158 F 25 to 470 C Environmental Characteristics Same Characteristics as Sepam Base Units Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric MT10151 Installation A CAUTION HAZARD OF CUTS Trim the edges of the cut out plates to remove any jagged edges Failure to follow this instruction can cause serious injury DSM303 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DSM303
14. DE80038 DE80022 DE51668 Installation Male 9 Pin Sub D Connector Supplied with the ACE9092 ACE909 2 Rx Tx OV RS 232 RS 485 PhN V V L L 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ACE9092 RS232 RS485 Converter Description and Dimensions A Terminal block for RS232 link limited to 33 ft 10 m Female 9 pin sub D connector to connect to the 2 wire RS485 network with distributed power supply 1 screw type male 9 pin sub D connector is supplied with the converter Power supply terminal block 1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch 12 V DC or 24 V DC 2 Protection fuse unlocked by a 1 4 turn 3 LEDs m ON OFF on if ACE9092 is energized m Tx on if RS232 sending by ACE9092 is active m Rx on if RS232 receiving by ACE9092 is active 4 SW1 parameter setting of 2 wire RS485 network polarization and line impedance matching resistors Function SW1 SW1 2 SW1 3 Polarization at 0 V via Rp 470 Q ON Polarization at 5 V via Rp 470 Q ON 2 Wire RS485 Network Impedance ON Matching by 150 Q Resistor 5 SW2 parameter setting of asynchronous data transmission rate and format same parameters as for RS232 link and 2 wire RS485 network Rate Baud SW21 SW2 2 SW2 3 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 o o o 4 rl lolo olo 38400 Format SW2 A
15. MT10196 H O3 Output Other Level n Sepam Relay Level n Sepam Receipt of BI When a fault occurs in a radial network the fault current flows through the circuit between the source and the location of the fault m The protection units upstream from the fault are triggered m The protection units downstream from the fault are not triggered m Only the first protection unit upstream from the fault should trip o Each Sepam relay is capable of sending and receiving blocking input Bl commands except for motor Sepam relays which can only send them When a Sepam relay is triggered by a fault current m It sends a blocking input command to output O3 2 m It trips the associated circuit breaker if it does not receive a blocking input command on the blocking input logic input 9 e g Radial distribution with use of time based protection TD tripping time definite time curves Once sent the blocking input lasts the duration of the fault until cleared It is H interrupted after a time delay that accounts for the breaking device operating time and protection unit reset time This system minimizes fault duration and optimizes discrimination MT10197 Pilot Wire Test The pilot wire test may be performed using the output relay test function 1 Motor Sepam relays are not affected by the receipt of blocking input since they are designed for loads only 2 Default parameter setting
16. measurements D Key 5 switchgear diagnosis rms Measurements Bar Graphs j clear And additional measurements a Key amp general settings D Key L protection settings m When the user presses a key the system moves on to the next screen in the loop When a screen includes more than 4 lines the user can move about in the screen via the cursor keys A V Average Overcurrent Ir Bar Graph Temperatures 1t04 QA Sensors Temperatures 5108 Temperature Sensors Protection and Parameter Setting Modes There are 3 levels of use m Operator level o Used to access all the screens in read mode o Does not require any passwords m Protection setting level o Requires the entry of the first password key o Allows protection setting key m Parameter setting level o Requires the entry of the second password key o Allows modification of the general settings as well key Only parameter setting level can modify the 4 digit passwords MT10808 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 ectric 183 Use Advanced UMI White Keys for Current Operation GE Key FIT The metering key is used to display the variables measured by the Sepam relay MT10829 la 162A nus Ib 161A rms Ic 163A nus E Key The diagnosis key provides access to diagnostic data on the breaking device and additional meas
17. 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE80118 DE80119 Installation LZ ET CT 1A 2 turns CT 5A 4 turns xp CCA630 CT 1A 2 turns CT 5A 4 turns 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved CSH30 Interposing Ring CT Connection The CSH30 is adapted for the type of current transformer 1 A or 5 A by the number of turns of the secondary wiring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT m 5A rating 4 turns m 1 A rating 2 turns Connection to 5 A secondary circuit Connection to 1 A secondary circuit PE50033 PE50034 1 Plug into the connector 1 Plug into the connector 2 Insert the transformer secondary wire 2 Insert the transformer secondary wire through the CSH30 interposing ring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT 4 times CT twice Connection to Sepam Series 20 and Sepam Series 40 m To residual current Ir input on connector terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connection to Sepam Series 80 m To residual current Ir input on connector B terminals 15 and 14 shielding m To residual current l r input on connector B terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended Cable m Sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid m Minimum cable cross section 0 0014 in 0 93 mm AWG 18 o Max 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 m Resistance per unit length 100 mQ m 30 5 mQ ft m Minimum dielectric strength 1000 V 700 Vr
18. 26 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 36 37 46 48 50 52 53 54 55 57 58 59 60 25 Protection Functions Setting Ranges 5 100 of Vip 0 05 300 s 15 60 of Vp 0 05 300 s 5 100 of Vip 0 05 300 s 5 100 of V p 0 05 300 s 0 15 1 lg 0 05 300 s Alarm and Trip Set Points 32 to 356 F or 0 180 C Definite Time DT 0 1 5 lg 0 1 300 s Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT 0 1 0 5 lg 0 1 1 s 0 5 5 lg ST Starting Time 0 5 300 s LT and LTS Time Delays 0 05 300 s ANSI 49RMS Thermal Overload Rate Rate Accounting for Negative Sequence Component 0 2 25 4 5 9 Time Constant Heating T1 1 120 min T1 1 120 min Cooling T2 5 600 min T2 5 600 min Alarm and Tripping Set Points 50 300 of Rated Thermal Capacity Cold Curve Modification Factor 0 100 Switching of Thermal Settings Conditions By Logic Input 126 Transformer By Is Set Point Adjustable from 0 25 to 8 lg Motor Maximum Equipment Temperature 140 392 F 60 200 C ANSI 50 51 Phase Overcurrent Tripping Time Delay Timer Hold Tripping Curve Definite Time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E EI F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Is Set Point 0 1 to 24 IN DT Inst 0 05 300 s 0 1 to 2 4 IN IDMT 0 1 12 5 s at 10 Is Timer Hold Definite Time DT Timer Hold Inst 0 05 300 s Inverse Definite Mini
19. Block Diagram Sepam S20 S23 T20 T23 or M20 126 Blocking Input Q Block Start Protection 66 Starts per Hour Trip Circuit Fault D D O 2 gt pni I TC1 Open Command T 200 ms 125 Block O Remote Control 4 B TC1 Included 112 Device Closed Block Diagram Sepam B21 or B22 125 Pressure Drop SF6 1 126 Pressure Drop SF6 2 T T 200 ms 0 121 External Tripping 1 122 External Tripping 2 123 External Tripping 3 114 External Tripping 4 TC2 Close Command 125 Remote Control Disable 125 Block Remote Control TC1 Included 72 63230 216 208C1 Trip Circuit Fault 2 TC1 Open Command 112 Device Closed 112 Device Close 02 Block Closing Tripping NO or NC O1 Tripping Q Close Block Closing Tripping N O or N C 1 Data used in the logic block diagram depend on the Sepam type availability of the MES114 option and general parameters 2 The usual case in which O2 is set to Normally closed 3 Performs B20 type functions Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Electric MT10188 MT10189 MT10190 MT10191 Control and Monitoring Functions RESET Key Acknowledgment TC5 Remote Control Block I25 External Reset 114 TC1 Received 111 TC2 Received 112 Wiring for undervoltage tr
20. Definite Time Protection ISO is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay t Definite Tme Protection Principle Inverse Definite Minimum Time Protection Inverse definite minimum time protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards DE80109 DE50247 Ground Fault ANSI Code 50N 51N or 50G 51G Name of Curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC standard inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse 2 2 2 2 12 IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 Note The curve equations are given in IDMT Protection Functions page 61 The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m If Ir gt 20 Isr then tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Isr m If Ir 15 Inr then tripping time is the time that corresponds to 15 INr Block Diagram H la Ib Pick Up Signal and to Logic Discrimination Ir gt Isr H2 Restraint 123
21. Optic Wye Rx Tx Rx Tx ACE969FO 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi Protocol Interfaces Connection 2 wire RS485 Communication Ports S LAN or E LAN m Connection of RS485 twisted pair S LAN or E LAN to black terminals A and B m Connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply to green terminals V and V m The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable H The network cable must be stripped o The cable shielding must be around and in contact with the clamp a Shielding continuity of incoming and outgoing cables is ensured by the electrical continuity of the clamps m All cable clamps are linked by an internal connection to the grounding terminals of the ACE969 interface O Protective and functional grounding H The shielding of the RS 485 cables is grounded as well m On the ACE969TP interface the cable clamps for the S LAN and E LAN RS485 networks are grounded Note The shield connection should be grounded at only one end of the serial daisy chain Fiber Optic Communication Port S LAN 4 CAUTION HAZARD OF BLINDING Never look directly into the fiber optic Failure to follow this instruction can cause serious injury The fiber optic connection can be made m Point to point to an optic star system m in a ring system active echo The sending and r
22. Relay 8 xx 08 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or Disabled D 2 Alarm Set Point C 3 Trip Set Point C 4 8 Reserved Schneider 111 Modbus Communication 112 63230 216 208C1 Access to Remote Settings ANSI 46 Negative Sequence Unbalance Function Number 0301 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enable or Disabled e 2 Tripping Curve 5 3 Is Set Point lg 4 Tripping Time Delay 10 ms ANSI 48 51LR 14 Locked Rotor Excessive Starting Time Function Number 0601 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or Disabled D 2 Is Set Point IB 3 Excessive Starting Time Delay ST 10 ms 4 Locked Rotor Time Delay LT 10 ms 5 Locked Rotor on Start Time Delay LTS 10 ms ANSI 49RMS Thermal Overload Function Number 0401 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enable or Disabled D 2 Negative Sequence Factor 6 3 Is Set Point for Switching from Group A Group B lg 4 Accounting for Ambient Temperature 5 Maximum Equipment Temperature C 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Group A Heat Rise Alarm Set Point 9 Group A Heat Rise Tripping Set Point 10 Group A Heating Time Constant min 11 Group A Cooling Time Constant min 12 Group A Initial Heat Rise Value 13 Group B Enabled or Disabled D 14 Group B Heat Rise Alarm Set Point 15 Group B Heat Rise Tripping Set Point 16 Group B Heating Time Consta
23. for a fast and reliable disconnection Communication Sepam relays can be connected to a supervision communication network S LAN based on the following communication protocols m Modbus RTU m DNP3 m IEC 60870 5 103 Also Sepam relays can manage equipment from a centralized remote monitoring System since all necessary data are available via the communication port m Reading all measurements alarms protection settings etc m Writing breaking device remote control commands etc Diagnosis 3 types of diagnosis data are available for improved operation m Network and Machine Diagnosis Tripping current unbalance ratio disturbance recording m Switchgear Diagnosis Cumulative breaking current operating time m Diagnosis of the Protection Unit and Additional Modules Continuous self testing watchdog Control and monitoring The circuit breaker program logic is ready to use requiring no auxiliary relays or additional wiring User Machine Interface Two levels of User Machine Interface UMI are available to suit any application m Basic UMI An economical solution for installations that do not require local operation i e that are run via a remote monitoring and control system m Fixed or Remote Advanced UMI A graphic LCD display and 9 key keypad are used to display the measurement and diagnosis values alarm and operating messages and to provide access to protection and parameter setting values for installations that
24. 2 wires 0 0003 0 0016 in 0 2 1 mm AWG 24 18 Ring Lug CCA622 0 25 in 6 35 mm B Screw CCT640 1 wire 0 0003 0 0039 in 0 2 2 5 mm Type AWG 24 12 2 wires 0 0003 0 0016 in 0 2 1 mm AWG 24 18 C RJ45 CCA612 D RJ45 CCA770 L 2 ft 0 6 m CCA772 L 6 6 ft 2 m CCA774 L 13 ft 4 m 132 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric DE51831 DE51832 DE51833 DE51834 DE51835 Installation Base Unit Other Voltage Input Connection Schemes The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the CCT640 connector item B on Sepam Series 20 type B units The CCT640 connector contains 4 transformers which perform isolation and impedance matching of the VTs and Sepam input circuits s Parameters c Voltages Measured by VT Van Vbn Vcn je Residual Voltage Sum of 3Vs Functions Available Voltages Measured Van Vbn Vcn Values Calculated Vab Vbc Vca Vr V1 f Measurements Available All Protection Functions Available All According to Type of Sepam Relay Parameters Voltages Measured by VT Van Vbn Ven Residual Voltage External VT CCT640 Functions Available Voltages Measured V1 V2 V3 Vr Values Calculated Vab Vbc Vca V1 f Measurements Available All Protection Functions Available All According to Type of Sepam Relay n Parameters c Voltages
25. 5 for Is gt 0 1 IN i Time Delay T 0 011B Is Setting 50 ms lt T lt 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Operating Principle Characteristic Times 1 06 Is Operating Time lt 50 ms 8 Overshoot Time lt 35 ms E Reset Time 40 ms 0 1 IB Pick Up Signal Time Delayed Output l Case of current sag 1 06 Is Is 0 1 IB MT10866 Pick Up Signal 0 Time Delayed Output 0 Case of circuit breaker tripping Schneider D Electric 32 63230 216 208C1 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Temperature Monitoring ANSI Code 38 49T Operation This protection is associated with a Pt100 platinum 100 Q at 32 F or 0 C Ni100 or Ni120 nickel type resistance temperature detector RTD in accordance with the IEC 60751 and DIN 43760 standards m Picks up when the monitored temperature is greater than the Ts set point m Has two independent set points o Alarm set point H Tripping set point m When the protection is activated it detects whether the RTD is shorted or disconnected o RTD shorting is detected if the measured temperature is less than 31 F 35 C measurement displayed o RTD disconnection is detected if the measured temperature is greater than 401 F 205 C measurement displayed Note If an RTD f
26. ACE937 Fiber Optic Interface Function The ACE937 interface is used to connect the Sepam relay to a fiber optic communication star system This remote module is connected to the Sepam base unit by a CCA612 cord Characteristics Weight 0 22 Ib 0 1 kg Assembly On Symmetrical DIN rail Power Supply Supplied by Sepam Operating Temperature 13 to 158 F 25 to 70 C Environmental Characteristics Same Characteristics as Sepam Base Units 1 70 mm 2 8 in with CCA612 Cord Connected ACE937 160 63230 216 208C1 Schneider Fiber Type Graded Index Multimode Silica Wavelength 820 nm Invisible Infrared Type of Connector ST BFOC Bayonet Fiber Optic Connector A CAUTION Fiber Optic Numerical Maximum Minimum optical Maximum Diameter Aperture NA Attenuation Power Available Fiber Length HAZARD OF BLINDING um dBm km dBm Never look directly into the end of the fiber optic i FAR 50 125 0 2 2 7 5 6 2300 ft 700 m Failure to follow this instruction can cause 62 5 125 0 275 32 94 5900 ft 1800 m PPM Mury 100 140 0 3 4 149 9200 ft 2800 m 200 HCS 0 37 6 19 2 8500 ft 2600 m Maximum length calculated with m Minimum optical power available m Maximum fiber attenuation m Losses in 2 ST connectors 0 6 dBm m Optical power margin 3 dBm according to IEC 60870 standard Example for a 62 5 125 um fiber Lmax 9 4 3 0 6 3 2 1
27. CCA770 Remote Module Connection Cord L 2 ft 0 6 m CCA772 Remote Module Connection Cord L 6 6 ft 2 m CCA774 Remote Module Connection Cord L 13 ft 4 m CCA612 Communication Network interface Cord L 9 8 ft 3 m CCA783 PC Connection Cord CCA613 LPCT Test Plug ACE917 LPCT Injection Adapter CCA620 20 pin Screw Type Connector CCA622 20 pin Ring Lug Connector AMT840 Mounting Plate for DSM303 ACE990 Zero Sequence CT Interface for IO Input Kit 2640 2 Sets of Spare Connectors SFT2841 CD ROM with SFT2841 and SFT2826 Software Without CCA783 Cord ACE969 TP 2 Wire RS485 Multi Protocol Interface Modbus DNP3 or IEC 60870 5 103 ACE969 FO Fiber Optic Multi Protocol Interface Modbus DNP3 or IEC 60870 5 103 1 List of cancelled references and their replacements m 59602 base unit with basic UMI 24 V DC power supply cancelled and replaced by reference 59603 W 59606 base unit with advanced UMI 24 V DC power supply cancelled and replaced by reference 59607 m 59645 MES108 41 40 module cancelled and replaced by reference 59646 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 123 lectric DE80029 Installation LI OTO OOOO 8 74 222 6 176 Front view of Sepam Relay A CAUTION HAZARD OF CUTS Trim the edges of the cut out plates to remove any jagged edges Failure to follow this
28. D Electric Installation 122 63230 216 208C1 DE50531 DE52148 DE 52259 Equipment Identification Identification of the Base Unit Each Sepam comes in a single package which contains the base unit and the base unit 20 pin connector CCA620 or CCA622 The other optional accessories such as modules current or voltage input connectors and cords come in separate packages To identify a Sepam check the 2 labels on the right side panel of the base unit describing the product s functional and hardware features m Hardware reference and designation label User Machine Interface model Power supply 59607 amp 59606 Serial No 0312024 Sepam serie20 advanced UMI 24 250V Origin France Sepam serie20 IHM avanc e 24 25 j C SAX TW mmm EHE EET TT Il II DIU M LH EU S10 UD XXX JXX XNT Schneider d Eectric m Functional reference and designation label Substation Sous station 59620 4 Type of application English French 59609 Working language C04 I IM INN MI MITTAT ccitionat information AIRMAN TTL AJ ter Systomatent Spe Identification of Accessories The accessories such as optional modules current or voltage connectors and connection cords come in separate packages which are identified by labels m Example of MES114 module identification label Part number 59646 Serial No 0304169 10 inputs 4 outputs 24 250 V DC Origin France 10 entr es 4 sorties 24 250 V CC C
29. Disturbance Recording Triggering By Selected Logic Inputs Manual Disturbance SFT2841 F Recording Triggering Disturbance Recording Triggering TC10 Blocking of SFT2841 F Disturbance Recording TC8 Triggering Validation of Disturbance Recording SFT28A1 F Triggering TC9 Manual Disturbance SFT2841 F Recording Triggerin N TC10 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Control and Monitoring Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Switching of Groups of Settings Description There are four relays for the phase overcurrent and ground fault protection functions split into two groups of two relays Group A and Group B respectively The Sepam protective relays are used as specified in its parameter settings The Switching of Groups of Settings function enables activation of the group A or group B protective functions m According to the status of logic input 113 0113 0 Activation of Group A 0113 1 Activation of Group B m Or via the communication link o TC3 Activation of Group A o TC4 Activation of Group B The use of the switching of groups of settings functions does not exclude the use of the zone selective interlocking function Block Diagram Choice via Input 113 DE80063 Input 113 Choice via Remote Control Group A TC3 Group B TC4 Choice via Input 113 Input 113 Choice via Remote Co
30. O1 O3 m N C Output Contacts O4 m impulse mode No Latched Program Logic m Circuit breaker control No m Logic input assignment Not used General Characteristics m Network frequency 50 Hz m Enable remote setting No m Working language English m Primary rated voltage V p 20 kV m Secondary rated voltage V s 100 V m Voltages measured by VTs Van Vbn Vcn m Residual voltage sum of 3Vs m Pre trig for disturbance recording 36 Cycles Default Parameter Setting Protection Functions m All the protections are Off m The settings comprise values and choices that are informative and consistent with the general characteristics by default m Latching no m Disturbance recording triggering with Control Matrix m Assignment of output relays and LEDs according to chart Functions Outputs LEDs B21 B22 O1 O2 O3 O4 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 27D 1 27D 1 27D 2 27D 2 L 27R 27R 27 1 27 1 27 2 27 2 B 27S 1 278 1 n 278 2 278 2 L L 278 3 278 3 nu 59 1 59 1 E 59 2 59 2 E n 59N 1 59N 1 L L 59N 2 59N 2 L L 81H 81H L 81L 1 81L 1 a 81L 2 81L 2 81R n m Disturbance recording triggering upon signal pick up m Watchdog on output O4 LED Marking L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 1 Type B21 performs the same functions as cancelled type B20 190 63230 216 208C1 V 27 V 27D V 27R
31. Reading of Modbus event counters Function 15 Writing of n bits O Function 16 Writing of n words m Communication management functions O Function 8 Modbus diagnosis O Function 11 Reading of Modbus event counter O Function 43 Sub function 14 Reading of identification DO Do D0 000 The following exception codes are supported m 1 Unknown function code m 2 Incorrect address m 3 Incorrect data m 4 Not ready cannot process request m 7 Not acknowledged remote reading and setting Response Time The communication coupler response time Tr is less than 15 ms including a 3 character silence approximately 3 ms at 9600 baud This time is given with the following parameters m 9600 baud m Format 8 bits odd parity 1 stop bit Broadcasting Question DE50378 Tr x 15 ms Synchronization of Exchanges Any character that is received after a silence of more than 3 characters is considered as the beginning of a frame A silence of at least 3 characters must be left on the line between two frames e g at 9600 baud this time is equal to approximately 3 ms Modbus Protocol Protocol Principle Master MT10203 Request Slave Slave Slave Exchanges are initiated by the master and include a request by the master and a reply by the slave Sepam Requests by the master are either
32. Remote Advanced UMI Module Description and Dimensions The module is simply flush mounted and secured by its clips No additional screw type fastening is required Front view Side view in E mm 112 3 4 E pH cst X NE NE EE 5 GN s la 2 165A nus T 45 6 lb 166A nus Qo 117 8 Mic 167A aus M e 99999 PISA Green LED Sepam on Red LED Steadily on module unavailable Flashing Sepam link unavailable 9 yellow LEDs Label identifying the LEDs Graphic LCD screen Display of measurements Display of switchgear network and machine diagnosis data Display of alarm messages Sepam reset or confirm data entry 10 Alarm acknowledgment and clearing or move cursor up 11 LED test or move cursor down 12 Access to protection settings 13 Access to Sepam parameters 14 Entry of 2 passwords 15 PC connection port 16 Mounting clip 17 Gasket to ensure NEMA 12 tightness gasket supplied with the DSM303 module to be installed if necessary Nau COON Oo RW RJ45 lateral output connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord Cut out for Flush Mounting Mounting Plate Thickness 0 12 in or 3 mm in mm 8 E a Connection RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord The DSM303 module is always the last interlinked remote module and it systematically ensures impedance matching by load res
33. Schneider Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49RMS For self ventilated rotating machines cooling is more effective when the machine is running than when it is stopped Determining whether to run or stop the equipment is calculated from the value of the current m Running if gt 0 1 lg m Stopped if 0 1 lg Two time constants may be set m T1 Heat rise time constant is for running equipment m T2 Cooling time constant is for stopped equipment Accounting for Harmonics The current measured by the thermal protection is an RMS 3 phase current that accounts for up to the 17th harmonic Accounting for Ambient Temperature Most machines are designed to operate at a maximum ambient temperature of 104 F 40 C The thermal overload function takes into account the ambient temperature Sepam relay equipped with the temperature sensor option to increase the calculated heat rise value when the temperature measured exceeds 104 F 40 C Tmax 104 F Tmax Tambient Tmax is the equipment s maximum temperature according to insulation class Tambient is the measured temperature Increase factor fa 1 MET1482 module has one RTD input RTD 8 predefined for ambient temperature measurement Adaptation of the Protection to Motor Thermal Withstand Motor thermal protection is often set based on the hot and cold curves supplied by the machine manufacturer To fully comply with these curves additional parameters must be set
34. Tripping Current Tripla Triplb Triplc Triplr Unbalance Ratio Negative Sequence Current I2 Disturbance Recording a u Thermal Capacity Used nu Remaining Operating Time Before Overload Tripping Waiting Time After Overload Tripping L Running Hours Counter Operating Time Starting Current and Time Block Start Time Number of Starts Before Blocking Switchgear Diagnosis Cumulative Breaking Current u L Trip Circuit Supervision u u o u Hu o o Number of Operations Operating Time Charging Time u o u u Hu Control and Monitoring ANSI Code Circuit Breaker Contactor Control 1 94 69 Hu m o o o o o Latching Acknowledgment 86 L u u Zone Selective Interlocking 68 oO o u o Hu Switching of Groups of Settings m2 m2 m2 m2 m2 Block Protection of 50N 51N by an Input o Annunciation 30 a Additional Modules 8 Temperature Sensor Inputs MET1482 Module u u o 1 Low Level Analog Output MSA141 Module u o u u o o u Mee MESE EES 14F Module 101 40 a a E g ACEBAG2 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO E 5 E 7 T m Standard o According to parameter setting and MES114 MES114E MES114F MET1482 MSA141input output option modules and ACE9492 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP ACE969FO communications option modules 1 For normally open or normally closed trip contact 2 Exclusive choice between zone selective interlocking and switching from one 2 relay group of settings to anoth
35. V gt 59 V gt 59N F 81H F 81L F 81L Trip Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Commissioning A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should commission this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions m NEVER work alone m Obey all existing safety instructions when commissioning and maintaining high voltage equipment m Beware of potential hazards and wear personal protective equipment Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Commissioning Principles and Method Protection Relay Testing Protection relays are tested prior to commissioning with the dual aim of maximizing availability and minimizing the risk of malfunction of the assembly being commissioned The problem consists of defining the consistency of the appropriate tests keeping in mind that the relay is always involved as the main link in the protection chain Therefore protection relays based on electromechanical and solid state technologies must be systematically submitted to detailed testing not only to qualify relay commissioning but also to check that they actually are in good operating order and have the required level of performance The Sepam Concept Makes It Possible to do Away With Such Testin
36. s v Curve T 1s M Y x Curve T 1s aw I j N 10 00 x x E N RI T Inverse Time SIT N 1 00 4 N N Very Inverse Time VIT or LTI Sy T Y N Extremely Inverse EIT Ultra Inverse UIT ls Vs 0 10 gt 0 10 T 1 10 100 1 10 100 IEEE Curves IAC Curves t s t s 10000 00 1 000 00 8 er 100 00 1 100 00 10 00 10 00 1 00 1 00 Vis 0 10 gt ils 0 10 b 1 10 100 1 10 100 Schneider 63230 216 208C1 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Protection Functions 66 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Control and Monitoring Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents Description Definition of Symbols Assignment of Logic Inputs Outputs Circuit Breaker Contactor Control Zone Selective Interlocking Disturbance Recording Triggering Switching of Groups of Settings Indications Control Matrix Schneider 63230 216 208C1 D Electric 68 69 70 71 78 80 81 82 84 67 DE51156 Control and Monitoring Description Functions Sepam relays perform the control and monitoring functions necessary for proper electrical network operation Predefined Functions The main control and monitoring functions are predefined and designed for the most commonly used applications They are easily commissioned by simply setting a few device parameters after the necessary logic inputs outputs have
37. should be selected per ANSI C37 110 which can be critical for high X R systems and systems with generators larger than 2MW For Overcurrent Protection m Definite time DT The saturation current must be more than 1 5 times the setting value m Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT The saturation current must be more than 1 5 times the highest working value on the curve Typical Applications When C37 110 Data Is Not Available Normal Performance Higher Performance ee cT Burden ANSI IEC Burden ANSI IEC Current in Ratio Designation Class Class Designation Class Class 5A 1005 B 01 Gio 1 Boe E o 5A 5005 B 05 cso BYA Bio co SMA 5A 12005 B 20 c2o0 RD B 4 0 caoo 19O VA 1A 100 1 B 0 1 cso A BO02 ion RD 1A 500 1 B 0 5 can RE B 1 0 caoo E 1A 1200 1 B 2 0 C1000 4 B 4 0 Co2000 4 2 2 1 Typical usual product offering from switchgear mfgs in North America for 50 51 protection 2 Generally suitable for systems with an X R 15 or small generator is connected to bus Minimum for 87 protection 3 CT ratio rule of thumb is to size primary to be 1 5 x connected load Example 600 5 ratio CT for 400A load 4 Not listed in C57 13 5 Highest listed VA in IEC 60044 is 30 VA Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Electric DE80051 DE80059 Installation CCA630 c CCA634 E os
38. synchronous mode Upon switching to synchronous mode the resetting process is based on the Architecture for External Synchronization via a Logic Input measurement of the difference between the relay s current time and the nearest ten second period at the time of the receipt of a synchronization pulse adapted to match the synchronization pulse period The synchronization pulse period is determined automatically by Sepam when it is energized based on the first two pulses received Therefore the synchronization pulse must be operational before Sepam is energized The synchronization function only operates after Sepam has been time set i e after the disappearance of the incorrect time event Any time changes greater than 4 seconds in amplitude are made by sending a new time frame The switch from daylight savings time to standard time and vice versa is made in this way as well There is a temporary loss of synchronism when the time is changed The external synchronization mode requires additional equipment a synchronization clock to generate a precise periodic synchronization time pulse If Sepam is in correct time and synchronous status and if the difference in synchronism between the nearest ten second period and the receipt of the synchronization pulse is greater than the synchronism error for 2 consecutive synchronization pulses it switches into non synchronous status and generates
39. used to delay the appearance of a b T 0 28 Equation b s r b DE50678 x DE50679 T __ gt S m Off delay timer used to delay the disappearance of a signal by a time T 0 T i DE50680 lt T 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 69 lectric Control and Monitoring Functions Assignment of Logic Inputs Outputs Before using the preset control and monitoring functions set the parameters and wire the inputs according to their application and type of Sepam relay Use the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software to assign inputs and set the control and monitoring function parameters Note Since an input may only be assigned to a single function not all the functions are available at the same time For example if the zone selective interlocking function is used the switching groups of settings function may not be used Table of Input Output Assignment by Application Logic inputs Open Position L nu 111 Closed Position L E nu 112 Zone Selective Interlocking Receive Blocking Input L H3 Switching of Groups of Settings A B B External Reset nu a nu E 114 External Tripping 4 nu a L E External Tripping 1 m 2 m 2 L 121 External Network Synchronization Ci a a External Tripping 2 m 3 a 3 122 Motor Re Ac
40. 0 0008 135 0 0160 0 0147 0 0120 0 0101 0 0085 0 0073 0 0064 0 0056 0 0049 0 0044 0 0039 0 0035 0 0023 0 0016 0 0011 0 0009 140 0 0183 0 0168 0 0138 0 0115 0 0097 0 0084 0 0073 0 0064 0 0056 0 0050 0 0045 0 0040 0 0026 0 0018 0 0013 0 0010 145 0 0206 0 0189 0 0155 0 0129 0 0110 0 0094 0 0082 0 0072 0 0063 0 0056 0 0051 0 0046 0 0029 0 0020 0 0015 0 0011 150 0 0229 0 0211 0 0172 0 0144 0 0122 0 0105 0 0091 0 0080 0 0070 0 0063 0 0056 0 0051 0 0032 0 0022 0 0016 0 0013 155 0 0253 0 0232 0 0190 0 0158 0 0134 0 0115 0 0100 0 0088 0 0077 0 0069 0 0062 0 0056 0 0035 0 0025 0 0018 0 0014 160 0 0276 0 0253 0 0207 0 0173 0 0147 0 0126 0 0109 0 0096 0 0085 0 0075 0 0067 0 0061 0 0039 0 0027 0 0020 0 0015 165 0 0299 0 0275 0 0225 0 0187 0 0159 0 0136 0 0118 0 0104 0 0092 0 0082 0 0073 0 0066 0 0042 0 0029 0 0021 0 0016 170 0 0323 0 0296 0 0242 0 0202 0 0171 0 0147 0 0128 0 0112 0 0099 0 0088 0 0079 0 0071 0 0045 0 0031 0 0023 0 0018 175 0 0346 0 0317 0 0260 0 0217 0 0183 0 0157 0 0137 0 0120 0 0106 0 0094 0 0084 0 0076 0 0048 0 0034 0 0025 0 0019 180 0 0370 0 0339 0 0277 0 0231 0 0196 0 0168 0 0146 0 0128 0 0113 0 0101 0 0090 0 0081 0 0052 0 0036 0 0026 0 0020 185 0 0393 0 0361 0 0295 0 0246 0 0208 0 0179 0 0155 0 0136 0 0120 0 0107 0 0096 0 0086 0 0055 0 0038 0 0028 0 0021 190 0 0417 0 0382 0 0313 0 0261 0 0221 0 0189 0 0164 0 0144 0 0127 0 0113 0 0101 0 0091 0 0058 0 0040 0 0030 0 0023 195 0 0441 0 0404 0 0330 0 0275 0 0233 0 0200 0 0173 0 0152 0 0134 0 0119 0 0107 0 0096
41. 0 0061 0 0043 0 0031 0 0024 200 0 0464 0 0426 0 0348 0 0290 0 0245 0 0211 0 0183 0 0160 0 0141 0 0126 0 0113 0 0102 0 0065 0 0045 0 0033 0 0025 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 208C1 45 D Electric Protection Functions Description The phase overcurrent function comprises four independant elements divided into two groups of two items called Group A and Group B respectively The use of the two groups may be chosen by parameter settings m Operation with Group A or Group B exclusively with switching from one group to the other dependent on the state of logic input 113 exclusively or by remote control TC3 TC4 113 2 0 group A 113 1 group B m Operation with Group A and Group B active for 4 set point operation m Enabling disabling of each group of 2 elements A B Operation The phase overcurrent protection function is three pole and picks up if one two or three of the phase currents reach the operation set point Also it is time delayed and it may have a definite time DT or an inverse definite minimum time IDMT time delay according to their curves Definite Time Protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay MT10533 Definite Time Protection Principle Inverse Definite Minimum Time Protection Inverse definite minimum time protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 stand
42. 0 1158 0 1045 0 0947 0 0863 180 0 7464 0 6904 0 6413 0 5978 0 4651 0 3747 0 3096 0 2608 0 2231 0 1933 0 1693 0 1495 0 1331 0 1193 0 1076 0 0976 0 0889 185 0 7777 0 7184 0 6665 0 6208 0 4816 0 3874 0 3197 0 2691 0 2301 0 1993 0 1744 0 1540 0 1371 0 1229 0 1108 0 1004 0 0915 190 0 8100 0 7472 0 6925 0 6444 0 4985 0 4003 0 3300 0 2775 0 2371 0 2052 0 1796 0 1585 0 1411 0 1264 0 1140 0 1033 0 0941 195 0 8434 0 7769 0 7191 0 6685 0 5157 0 4133 0 3403 0 2860 0 2442 0 2113 0 1847 0 1631 0 1451 0 1300 0 1171 0 1062 0 0967 200 0 8780 0 8075 0 7465 0 6931 0 5331 0 4265 0 3508 0 2945 0 2513 0 2173 0 1900 0 1676 0 1491 0 1335 0 1203 0 1090 0 0993 42 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Cold Curves for Es0 096 Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49RMS Setting Examples Wg 4 80 5 00 5 50 6 00 6 50 7 00 7 50 8 00 8 50 9 00 9 50 10 00 12 50 15 00 17 50 20 00 Es 50 0 0219 0 0202 0 0167 0 0140 0 0119 0 0103 0 0089 0 0078 0 0069 0 0062 0 0056 0 0050 0 0032 0 0022 0 0016 0 0013 55 0 0242 0 0222 0 0183 0 0154 0 0131 0 0113 0 0098 0 0086 0 0076 0 0068 0 0061 0 0055 0 0035 0 0024 0 0018 0 0014 60 0 0264 0 0243 0 0200 0 0168 0 0143 0 0123 0 0107 0 0094 0 0083 0 0074 0 0067 0 0060 0 0038 0 0027 0 0020 0 0015 65 0 0286 0 0263 0 0217 0 0182 0 0155 0 0134 0 0116 0 0102 0 0090 0 0081 0 0072 0 0065 0 0
43. 0 4041 0 3792 0 3567 0 2849 0 2336 0 1954 0 1661 0 1431 0 1246 0 1096 0 0972 0 0868 0 0780 0 0705 0 0640 0 0584 125 0 4545 0 4250 0 3986 0 3747 0 2988 0 2446 0 2045 0 1737 0 1495 0 1302 0 1144 0 1014 0 0905 0 0813 0 0735 0 0667 0 0609 130 0 4778 0 4465 0 4184 0 3930 0 3128 0 2558 0 2136 0 1813 0 156 0 1358 0 1193 0 1057 0 0943 0 0847 0 0766 0 0695 0 0634 135 0 5016 0 4683 0 4386 0 4117 0 3270 0 2671 0 2228 0 1890 0 1625 0 1414 0 1242 0 1100 0 0982 0 0881 0 0796 0 0723 0 0659 140 0 5260 0 4907 0 4591 0 4308 0 3414 0 2785 0 2321 0 1967 0 1691 0 147 0 1291 0 1143 0 1020 0 0916 0 0827 0 0751 0 0685 145 0 5511 0 5136 0 4802 0 4502 0 3561 0 2900 0 2414 0 2045 0 1757 0 1527 0 1340 0 1187 0 1058 0 0950 0 0858 0 0778 0 0710 150 0 5767 0 5370 0 5017 0 4700 0 3709 0 3017 0 2509 0 2124 0 1823 0 1584 0 1390 0 1230 0 1097 0 0984 0 0889 0 0806 0 0735 155 0 6031 0 5610 0 5236 0 4902 0 3860 0 3135 0 2604 0 2203 0 189 0 1641 0 1440 0 1274 0 1136 0 1019 0 0920 0 0834 0 0761 160 0 6302 0 5856 0 5461 0 5108 0 4013 0 3254 0 2701 0 2283 0 1957 0 1699 0 1490 0 1318 0 1174 0 1054 0 0951 0 0863 0 0786 165 0 6580 0 6108 0 5690 0 5319 0 4169 0 3375 0 2798 0 2363 0 2025 0 1757 0 1540 0 1362 0 1213 0 1088 0 0982 0 0891 0 0812 170 0 6866 0 6366 0 5925 0 5534 0 4327 0 3498 0 2897 0 2444 0 2094 0 1815 0 1591 0 1406 0 1253 0 1123 0 1013 0 0919 0 0838 175 0 7161 0 6631 0 6166 0 5754 0 4487 0 3621 0 2996 0 2526 0 2162 0 1874 0 1641 0 1451 0 1292
44. 1 Activation by the protection 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 109 lectric Modbus Communication 110 63230 216 208C1 Access to Remote Settings General Characteristics Settings Read Only Function Number 3002 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Rated Frequency 0 50Hz 1 60Hz 2 Remote Setting Enabled 1 Disabled 3 Sepam Working Language 0 English 1 Customized Language 4 Number of Period Before 1 disturbance Recording 5 Active Setting Group 0 Setting Group A 1 Setting Group B 2 setting Group A and B 3 Choice by Input 113 4 Choice by Remote Control 5 Zone Selective Interlocking 6 Setting Mode 0 TMS 1 10l Is 7 Type of Phase Current Sensor 0 5ACT 1 1ACT 2 LPTC 8 Number of CT 0 3 CT la Ib Ic 1 2CT la Ic 9 Rated Current A 10 Base Current A 11 Residual Current Mode 0 3l sum 122A rated CSH 2 20A rated CSH 3 1ACT A 5ACT 5 ACE990 Range 1 6 ACE990 Range 2 12 Rated Residual Current Ino A 13 Integration Period 0 5 min 1 10 min 2 215 min 3 30 min 4 60 min 14 Reserved 15 Rated Primary Voltage Vi p V 16 Rated Secondary Voltage Vis 0 100V 1 110V 2 115V 3 120V 4 200V 5 230V 17 Voltages Measured by VT 0 2 3 VTs Van Vbn Vcn 122 VTs Vab Vbc 2 1 VT Vab 18 Residual Voltage Mode 0 None 123Vsum 2 External VT Vi s v3 3 External VT Vi s 3 Schneider D Electric 2007 Schne
45. 12 13 and 14 of this word trigger the transmission of a time tagged event Bits 3 to 0 encode a mapping number 1 15 which is used to identify the contents of the Modbus addresses the assignment of which varies depending on the application 63230 216 208C1 97 D Electric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Use of Remote Annunciation Sepam provides the communication link with 64 remote annunciation bits TS pre assigned to protection and control functions dependent on the Sepam model The TS can be read using the bit or word functions Each TS transition is time tagged and stored in the event stack see section Time tagging of events Address Word 0101 TS1 to TS16 Bit Address 1010 to 101F TS Use S20 S23 T20 T23 M20 B21 B22 1 Protection 50 51 Relay 1 Group A 2 Protection 50 51 Relay 2 Group A u 3 Protection 50 51 Relay 1 Group B L L u L 4 Protection 50 51 Relay 2 Group B L L u 5 Protection 50N 51N Relay 1 Group A L n L 6 Protection 50N 51N Relay 2 Group A L L n L 7 Protection 50N 51N Relay 1 Group B u 8 Protection 50N 51N Relay 2 Group B 9 Protection 49 RMS Alarm Set Point L 7 10 Protection 49 RMS Tripping Set Point u L 11 Protection 37 12 Protection 46 L u 13 Protection 48 51LR 14 Locked Rotor L 14 Protection 48 51LR 14 Locked Rotor on Start 15 Protection 48 51LR 1
46. 2 1 gt gt 51 LED 3 Tripping of Protection 50N 51N Unit 1 lo gt 51N LED 4 Tripping of Protection 50N 51N Unit 2 lo gt gt 51N LED 5 Ext LED 6 LED 7 Circuit Breaker Open 111 1 0 off LED 8 Circuit Breaker Closed 112 lon LED 9 Tripping by Circuit Breaker Control Trip 1 Assignment by default with MES1 14 The default parameter setting may be personalized using the SFT2841 software m The assignment of signal lamps to events is to be defined in the control matrix Screen m Editing and printing of personalized labels are proposed in the Sepam menu Schneider 63230 216 208C1 83 D Electric PE50610 Control and Monitoring Functions SET2841 Sepam serie 20 SeparConft General settings Fle dt Sepam Protectors Opon Window 7 Dau 0 tio ml SFT2841 control matrix Data All of the Application Protection Functions Control Matrix SFT2841 software tool Meaning Protection time delayed output and additional outputs when applicable The control matrix is used for simple assignment of the logic outputs and signal lamps to information produced by the protection units program logic and logic inputs Each column creates a logical OR between all the lines selected The following data are managed in the control matrix and may be set using the Comments 79 Cleared Fault The recloser function has sucessfully reclosed Impulse type output 79 Permanent Fault The circuit break
47. 3 IN Display Format 9 3 Significant Digits Resolution 0 1 A or 1 Digit Refresh Interval 1 s Typical 1 IN rated current set in the general settings 2 At IN in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Display of values 0 02 40 IN Residual Current Operation This operation gives the RMS value of the residual current Ir based on measurement of the fundamental component Note INr should be thought of as a relay input port for ground fault protection This port can accept residually connected phase CT and therefore measure positive negative and zero sequence components This port can also accept a zero sequence CT which measures only true zero sequence no positive or negative sequence So the port name Inr is just that a port name What kind of current positive negative or zero sequence depends on the type of CT used Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced UMI by pressing the O key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link m An analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement Range Connection to 3 Phase CT 0 1 1 5 INr 0 Connection to 1 CT 0 1 1 5 Inr 1 Connection to Zero Sequence CT with ACE990 0 1 1 5 INr Connection to CSH Residual 2 A Rating 0 2 3A Current Sensor 20 A Rating 2 30 A Unit AorkA Accuracy 2 Typically 1 at INr 2 from 0 3 1 5 INr 5 if 0
48. 5108 0 4408 0 3864 0 3429 0 3073 0 2776 0 2526 155 3 8067 1 5950 1 1047 0 8508 0 6909 0 5798 0 4978 0 4347 0 3846 0 3439 0 3102 0 2817 160 2 0369 1 3074 0 9808 0 7857 0 6539 0 5583 0 4855 0 4282 0 3819 0 3438 0 3118 165 2 8478 1 5620 1 1304 0 8905 0 7340 0 6226 0 5390 0 4738 0 4215 0 3786 0 3427 170 1 9042 1 3063 1 0076 0 8210 0 6914 0 5955 0 5215 0 4626 0 4146 0 3747 175 2 4288 1 5198 1 1403 0 9163 0 7652 0 6554 0 5717 0 5055 0 4520 0 4077 180 3 5988 1 7918 1 2933 1 0217 0 8449 0 7191 0 6244 0 5504 0 4908 0 4418 185 2 1665 1 4739 1 1394 0 9316 0 7872 0 6802 0 5974 0 5312 0 4772 190 2 7726 1 6946 1 2730 1 0264 0 8602 0 7392 0 6466 0 5733 0 5138 195 4 5643 1 9782 1 4271 1 1312 0 9390 0 8019 0 6985 0 6173 0 5518 200 2 3755 1 6094 1 2483 1 0245 0 8688 0 7531 0 6633 0 5914 Wg 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 4 20 4 40 4 60 Es 105 0 0209 0 0193 0 0180 0 0168 0 0131 0 0106 0 0087 0 0073 0 0063 0 0054 0 0047 0 0042 0 0037 0 0033 0 0030 0 0027 0 0025 110 0 0422 0 0391 0 0363 0 0339 0 0264 0 0212 0 0175 0 0147 0 0126 0 0109 0 0095 0 0084 0 0075 0 0067 0 0060 0 0055 0 0050 115 0 0639 0 0592 0 0550 0 0513 0 0398 0 0320 0 0264 0 0222 0 0189 0 0164 0 0143 0 0126 0 0112 0 0101 0 0091 0 0082 0 0075 120 0 0862 0 0797 0 0740 0 0690 0 0535 0 0429 0 0353 0 0297 0 0253 0 0219 0 0191 0 0169 0 0150 0 0134 0 0121 0 0110 0 0100 125 0 1089 0 1007 0 0934 0 0870 0 0673 0 0540 0 0444 0 0372 0 0317 0 0274 0 0240 0 0211 0
49. 630 m 5A for the following values in Amps 125 250 500 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 Block Diagram Without CCA613 Accessory DE80136 o Sepam S20 S23 cca670 120 123 M20 12345678 1 ananunua 0 82 Check 32 plug ACE917 la al Current Generator 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Commissioning Checking the Residual Current Input Connection Description Check to be carried out for Sepam S20 S23 T20 T23 or M20 when the residual current is measured by a specific sensor m CSH120 or CSH200 zero sequence CT m Another zero sequence CT connected to an ACE990 interface m Asingle 1 A or 5 A CT encompassing the 3 phases Procedure 1 Connect the single phase current generator to inject current into the primary circuit of the zero sequence CT or the CT in accordance with the diagram below DE80137 O Jo o Sepam S20 S23 T20 T23 M20 terminal festbox ALT GND FAULT CKT 2 Turn on the generator 3 Inject a 5 A primary residual current 4 Use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual current value is approximately equal to 5 A 5 Turn off the generator 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 197 lectric Commissioning Checking Phase Voltage Input Connections Description Check to be carried out for Se
50. 8373 0 7357 0 6539 0 5866 0 5302 0 4823 0 4412 0 4055 0 3742 0 3467 0 3222 0 3005 0 2809 0 2633 80 1 6094 1 2933 1 0822 0 9287 0 8109 0 7174 0 6413 0 5780 0 5245 0 4788 0 4394 0 4049 0 3747 0 3479 0 3241 0 3028 0 2836 85 1 8971 1 4739 1 2123 1 0292 0 8923 0 7853 0 6991 0 6281 0 5686 0 5180 0 4745 0 4366 0 4035 0 3743 0 3483 0 3251 0 3043 90 2 3026 1 6946 1 3618 1 1411 0 9808 0 8580 0 7605 0 6809 0 6147 0 5587 0 5108 0 4694 0 4332 0 4013 0 3731 0 3480 0 3254 95 1 9782 1 5377 1 2670 1 0780 0 9365 0 8258 0 7366 0 6630 0 6012 0 5486 0 5032 0 4638 0 4292 0 3986 0 3714 0 3470 100 2 3755 1 7513 1 4112 1 1856 1 0217 0 8958 0 7956 0 7138 0 6455 0 5878 0 5383 0 4953 0 4578 0 4247 0 3953 0 3691 105 3 0445 2 0232 1 5796 1 3063 1 1147 0 9710 0 8583 0 7673 0 6920 0 6286 0 5746 0 5279 0 4872 0 4515 0 4199 0 3917 110 2 3979 1 7824 1 4435 1 2174 1 0524 0 9252 0 8238 0 7406 0 6712 0 6122 0 5616 0 5176 0 4790 0 4450 0 4148 115 3 0040 2 0369 1 6025 1 3318 1 1409 0 9970 0 8837 0 7918 0 7156 0 6514 0 5964 0 5489 0 5074 0 4708 0 4384 120 2 3792 1 7918 1 4610 1 2381 1 0742 0 9474 0 8457 0 7621 0 6921 0 6325 0 5812 0 5365 0 4973 0 4626 125 2 9037 2 0254 1 6094 1 3457 1 1580 1 0154 0 9027 0 8109 0 7346 0 6700 0 6146 0 5666 0 5245 0 4874 130 2 3308 1 7838 1 4663 1 2493 1 0885 0 9632 0 8622 0 7789 0 7089 0 6491 0 5975 0 5525 0 5129 135 2 7726 1 9951 1 6035 1 3499 1 1672 1 0275 0 9163 0 8253 0 7494 0 6849 0 6295 0 5813 0 5390 140 2 2634 1 7626 1 4618 1 2528 1 0962 0 9734 0 8740 0 7916 0 722
51. All the remote control commands can be blocked by logic input 125 on the MES114 module According to the parameter setting of logic input 125 the tripping remote control TC1 can be activated at any time or can be blocked Logic input 125 can be set up according to 2 modes m Blocked if the input is set to 1 POS prefix m Blocked if the input is set to 0 NEG prefix The device tripping and closing and recloser enable and disable remote control are acknowledged if the CB control function is validated and if the inputs necessary for the logic are present on the MES114 or MES108 optional module Direct Remote Control Commands The remote control is executed when it is written in the remote control word The program logic resets itto zero after the remote control is acknowledged Confirmed Select Before Operate SBO Remote Control Commands In this mode remote control commands involve two steps m Selection by the master to be sent by writing of the bit in the STC word and checking of the selection by rereading the word m Execution of the command to be sent by writing of the bit in the TC word The remote control is executed if the bit in the STC word and the bit in the associated word are set the program logic resets the STC and TC bits to zero after the remote control is acknowledged Deselection of the STC bit takes place m If the master deselects it by writing in the STC word m f the master selects write
52. Checking Parameters and Protection Settings A check is necessary to confirm whether the Sepam parameter and protection settings have been entered or downloaded during commissioning testing and to confirm the conformity of the parameter and protection settings entered with the values determined during the study the aim of this check is not to confirm the relevance of the parameter and protection settings 1 Go through all the parameter and protection setting screens in the SFT2841 software in the order proposed in guided mode 2 For each screen compare the values entered in the Sepam with the values recorded in the parameter and protection setting file 3 Correct any parameter and protection settings that have not been entered correctly proceeding as indicated in the Use of the SFT2841 software section of this manual Conclusion Once the checking has been performed and proven conclusive as of that phase the parameter and protection settings should not be changed any further and are considered to be final In order to be conclusive the tests which follow must be performed with these parameter and protection settings no temporary modification of any of the values entered with the aim of facilitating a test is permissible Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Lp Electric Commissioning Checking Phase Current Input Connections 1 A 5 A Current Transformers Description Analysis to be carried out for S
53. Definite Time Protection Principle Inverse Definite Minimum Time Protection For I2 gt Is the time delay depends on the value of I2 lg Ig basis current of the protected equipment defined when the general parameters are set T corresponds to the time delay for 12 18 5 tA Inverse Definite Minimum Time Protection Principle 34 63230 216 208C1 Negative Sequence Current Unbalance ANSI Code 46 The tripping curve is defined according to the following equations m for Is lg lt l2 lg lt 0 3 19 2 es 1 5 IB m For 0 5 lt 12 18 lt 5 4 64 2 a IB m For 12 18 gt 5 t T Block Diagram B la i Ib 12 gt 1s T 0 Time Delayed Output Ic Pick Up Signal Characteristics Curve Setting Definite Time DT Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT Is Set Point Setting DT 10 lg lt Is lt 500 lg IDMT 10 lg Is 50 lg Resolution 1 Accuracy 1 Time Delay T Operation Time at 5 lg 5 Setting DT 100 ms lt T lt 300 s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt is Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Accuracy 1 DT 2 or 25 ms IDMT 5 or x35 ms Pick Up Drop Out Ratio Characteristic Times Operation Time 93 5 5 Pick Up lt 55 ms Overshoot Time 35 ms Reset Time 55 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions Negative Sequence Current Unbalan
54. Dimensions 124 Assembly 125 Description 126 Connection 127 Connection of Current Inputs 128 Other Phase Current Input Connection Schemes 129 Other Current Input Connection Schemes 130 Connection of Voltage Inputs 132 Other Voltage Input Connection Schemes 133 1 A 5 A Current Transformers 134 LPCT Type Current Sensors 137 CSH120 and CSH200 Zero Sequence CT 140 CSH30 Interposing Ring CT 142 ACE990 Zero Sequence CT Interface 144 Voltage Transformers 146 MES114 Module I O 147 Optional Remote Modules 150 MET1482 MSA141 or DSM303 Connection 150 MET1482 Temperature Sensor Module 151 MSA141 Analog Output Module 153 DSM303 Remote Advanced UMI Module 154 Communication Accessories Selection Guide 156 Communication Interface Connection 157 ACE9492 2 wire RS485 Network Interface 158 ACE959 4 wire RS485 Network Interface 159 ACE937 Fiber Optic Interface 160 ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi Protocol Interfaces 161 Description 163 Connection 164 ACE9092 RS232 RS485 Converter 166 ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS485 RS485 Converters 168 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 119 ectric Installation Safety Instructions Before Starting This page contains important safety instructions that must be followed precisely before attempting to install repair service or maintain electrical equipment Carefully read and follow the safety instructions described below A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Handli
55. PE50464 DE51734 63230 216 230 m Sepam IEC 60870 5 103 Communication Characteristics 16 Temperature m Mimic Based User Machine Interface for Local Control of the Device in Complete Safety Optional Logipam Programming Software for Programming Dedicated Functions DE51735 DE51736 2 63230 216 208C1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Introduction Overview of PowerLogic Sepam Protective Relays Standard Specific Substation Bus Transformer Motor Generator Capacitor Current Protection S20 T20 M20 Breaker Failure S23 T23 Voltage and B21 Frequency Protection Disconnection df dt B22 Current Voltage and S40 T40 G40 Frequency Protection Directional S41 M41 Ground Fault Directional S42 T42 Ground Fault and Phase Overcurrent Current Voltage and S80 B80 Frequency Protection Directional S81 T81 M81 Ground Fault Directional Ground Fault S82 T82 G82 and Phase Overcurrent Disconnection df dt S84 Current Voltage and Transformer or T87 M88 G88 Frequency Protection Machine Transformer Unit Differential Machine Differential M87 G87 Current Voltage and Voltage and B83 Frequency Protection Frequency Protection for 2 Sets of Busbars Current Voltage and Capacitor C86 Frequency Protection Bank Unbalance 20
56. Range 0 999 min Unit min Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 1 min Refresh Period 1 s Typical 20 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Machine Operation Assistance Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Starting Overload Current amp Starting Overload Time Starting Overload Current amp Starting Overload Time Operation The starting overload time is defined as the time between the moment at which one of the 3 phase currents exceeds 1 2 IB and the moment at which the 3 currents drop back below 1 2 lg The maximum phase current obtained during this period is the starting overload current The two values are saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced user machine interface UMI by pressing the key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link Characteristics Starting Overload Time Measurement Range 0 300 s Unit s or ms Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Refresh Interval 1 s Typical Starting Overload Current Measurement Range 1 2 lg to 24 IN Unit A or kA Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 0 1 A or 1 Digit Refresh Interval 1 s Typical 1 Or 65 5 kA Schneider 63230 216 208C1 21 D Electric Machine Operation Assistance Func
57. Reserved General Examination and Preliminary Actions Checking to Be Done Prior to Energizing Apart from the mechanical state of the equipment use the diagrams and BOMs provided by the contractor to check m Identification of Sepam relay and accessories defined by the contractor m Correct grounding of Sepam via terminal 17 of the 20 pin connector m Conformity of Sepam auxiliary voltage indicated on the label stuck to the right side of the base unit with the auxiliary supply voltage of the switchboard or cubicle m Correct connection of the auxiliary voltage o Terminal 1 AC or positive polarity o Terminal 2 AC or negative polarity m Presence of a residual current measurement zero sequence CT and or additional modules connected to Sepam when applicable m Presence of test terminal boxes upstream from current inputs and voltage inputs m Conformity of connections between Sepam terminals and the test terminal boxes Connections Check that the connections are tightened with equipment not energized The Sepam connectors must be correctly plugged in and locked Energizing 1 Switch on the auxiliary power supply 2 Check that Sepam performs the following initialization sequence which lasts approximately 6 seconds a Green ON and red X LEDs on o Red amp LED off o Pickup of watchdog contact The first screen displayed is the phase current or phase voltage metering screen according to the application Implementation of the SFT284
58. Rights Reserved G Electric DE50338 Modbus Communication Time Tagging of Events Master Computer Synchronization cont d External synchronization via a logic input mode The Sepam relay can be synchronized externally by means of a logic input 121 Clock the MES114 module is required The synchronisation pulse is determined by the rising edge of the logic input Sepam can adapt to all synchronization pulse periods from 10 60 s in 10 s increments The shorter the synchronization period the more accurately status changes are time tagged Sepam Relay The first time frame is used to initialize Sepam with the absolute date and time the following frames are used for the detection of any time changes The synchronization pulse is used to reset the Sepam relay s internal clock In the initialization phase when Sepam is in non synchronous mode resetting is allowed within an amplitude of 4 seconds JL Synchronization Link Network In the initialization phase the resetting process switching of Sepam into synchronous mode is based on a measurement of the difference between the relay s current time and the nearest ten second period This measurement is taken am at the time of the receipt of the synchronization pulse following the initialization time II frame Resetting is allowed if the difference is less than or equal to 4 seconds in which case Sepam switches to
59. SW2 5 With Parity Check 0 Without Parity Check 1 1 Stop Bit Compulsory for Sepam 0 2 Stop Bits 1 Converter Configuration When Delivered m 12 V DC distributed power supply m 11 bit format with parity check m 2 wire RS485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated Connection RS232 Link m To 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 screw type terminal block A m Maximum length 33 ft 10 m m Rx Tx RS232 receiving sending by ACE9092 m OV Rx Tx common do not ground 2 Wire RS485 Link with Distributed Power Supply m To connector female 9 pin sub D m 2 wire RS485 signals L L m Distributed power supply V 12 V DC or 24 V DC V 0 V Power Supply m To 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 screw type terminal block m Reversible phase and neutral m Grounded via terminal block and metal case ring lug on back of case Schneider 63230 216 208C1 167 D Electric Installation PE50036 ACE919CC RS485 RS485 Converter A DANG HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a proper
60. State P min Nt Clear Characteristics Period of Time P Setting 1 6 hrs Resolution 1 Nt Total Number of Starts Setting 1 60 Resolution 1 Nh and Nc Number of Consecutive Starts Setting 1 1to Nt Resolution 1 Time Delay T Between Starts Setting O min lt T lt 90 min Resolution 1 min or 1 Digit 1 With Nc Nh 54 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Recloser ANSI Code 79 Operation Initialization of the Recloser The recloser is ready to operate if all of the following conditions are met m CB control function is activated and the recloser is in service m Circuit breaker is closed m Block time delay is not running m None of the recloser blocking conditions is true see below Recloser Shots m Case of a cleared fault o Following a reclosing operation if the fault does not appear after the memory time delay has run out the recloser reinitializes and a message is displayed see example 1 page 56 m Case of a fault that is not cleared o Following instantaneous or time delayed tripping by the protection unit activation of the isolation time delay associated with the first active shot At the end of the time delay a closing command activates the memory time delay If the protection unit detects the fault before the end of the time delay a tripping command activates the following reclosing shot D After all the active shot
61. address zone any other address triggers an exception reply incorrect address a The first word in the reply zone function code and relay number has the same values as those described for the remote reading reply frame m xxyy a Function code xx different from 00 and FFh o Relay number yy different from FFh The settings are available and validated The word is a copy of the request frame The zone contents remain valid until the next request is made m 0000h o No request frame has been formulated yet as it is the case in particular when the Sepam is switched on H The other words are not significant m FFFFh a The request frame has been processed but the results in the reply frame are not yet available H It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading H The other words are not significant m xxFFh o With function code xx different from 00 and FFh H The function for which the remote reading request has been made is not valid a The function is not included in that particular Sepam or access to settings is impossible both in read and write mode 108 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Modbus Communication Access to Remote Settings Description of Settings Data Format All the settings are transmitted in signed 32 bit whole number encoded as a complement of 2 Particular setting value 7FFF FFFFh means that the setting is outside the validity range D The Enabled or Disabled set
62. addressed to a given Sepam relay identified by its number in the first byte of the request frame or addressed to all the Sepam relays broadcasting Master MT10204 Broadcasting Slave Slave Slave Broadcast commands are necessarily write commands No replies are transmitted by the Sepam MT10524 Request Reply Master Slave It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of the protocol unless the master is a central computer that requires the corresponding necessary programming All Modbus exchanges include 2 messages a request by the master and a reply by the Sepam All frames that are exchanged have the same structure with each message or frame containing 4 types of data Slave Function Data Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC 16 Number Code Zones Check Zone m Slave number 1 byte this indicates the receiving Sepam 0 to FFh If it is equal to zero the request concerns all the slaves broadcasting and there is no reply message m Function code 1 byte this is used to select a command read write bit word and to check that the reply is correct m Data zones n bytes these zones contain the parameters relating to the function bit address word address bit value word value number of bits number of words m Check zone 2 bytes this zone is used to d
63. are connected via an RJ45 plug to the CCA670 connector which is to be mounted on the rear panel of Sepam identified as m The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into the fail safe position m The primary rated current In measured by the LPCT sensors is to be entered as a Sepam general setting and configured by microswitches on the CCA670 connector 196 63230 216 208C1 Schneider Checking Phase Current Input Connections LPCT Type Current Sensors Procedure The tests to be carried out to check phase current input connections are the same whether the phase currents are measured by CTs or by LPCT sensors Only the Sepam current input connection procedure and current injection values change To test current inputs connected to LPCT sensors with a standard injection box the ACE917 injection adapter is required The ACE917 adapter is inserted between m The standard injection box m The LPCT test plug n Integrated in the Sepam CCA670 connector a Transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory The ACE917 injection adapter should be set according to the currents selected on the CCA670 connector the ACE917 setting should be equal to the number of the microswitch that is set to 1 on the CCA670 The injection value depends on the primary rated current selected on the CCA670 connector and entered in the Sepam general settings m 1A for the following values in Amps 25 50 100 133 200 320 400
64. below W 24 reserve words Reading the Contents of the Different Files Request Frame The master makes the request by writing the date of the record to be transferred function 16 in 4 words starting at the address 2200h Note Requesting a new record amounts to stopping the transfers which are in progress This is not the case for an identification zone transfer request 2200h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 BO8 BO7 BO6 BO5 B04 BO3 BO2 BO1 BOO O Oo O O O O O O Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y O O O O M M M M O O O D D D D D O O O H H H H H O O mn mn mn mn mn mn ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms m Y Years o 1 Byte o 0 99 years o The master must ensure that the year 00 is later than 99 m M Months o 1 Byte o 1 12 m D Days o 1 Byte n 1 31 m H Hours o 1 Byte 00 23 m mn Minutes o 1 Byte o 0 59 m ms Milliseconds n 2 Bytes o 0 59999 Reply Frame Reading of each portion of configuration and data file records by a reading frame function 3 of 125 words starting at the address 2300h 2300h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 Bog B08 B07 BO6 BO5 B04 BO3 B02 BO1 BOO Number of Usable Bytes Exchange Number in the Data Zone Reading should always begin with the first word in the address zone any other address triggers a
65. bit a bit other than the one already selected m f the master sets a bit in the TC word which does not match the selection In this case no remote control command is executed 100 63230 216 208C1 Data Addresses and Encoding Address Word 01F0 TC1 to TC16 Bit Address 1F00 to 1FOF TC Use S20 S23 T20 T23 M20 B21 B22 1 Tripping L L 2 Closing u L u n 3 Switching to Setting Group A 4 Switching to Setting Group B u L 5 Sepam Reset L L L L L L L 6 Peak Demand Current Zero Reset L u 7 7 Block Thermal Protection Ci u 8 Block Disturbance Recording Triggering L 7 9 Confirm Disturbance Recording Triggering L L L 10 Manual Disturbance Recording Triggering L 7 11 Enable Recloser 12 Disable Recloser 13 Confirm Thermal Protection L 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Reserved Analog Output Remote Control The analog output of the MSA141 module may be set up for remote control via the Modbus communication module word address 01F2 The working range of the numerical value transmitted is defined by the parameter setting of the min value and max value of the analog output This function is not affected by remote control blocking conditions Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric Modbus Communication Presentation The communication system time tags the data prcessed b
66. dt Dua Signal gt 0 5 VN dFs dt Pick Up Characteristics dFs dt Set Point Setting 0 1 10 Hz s Resolution 0 1 Hz s Accuracy Tripping 5 or 0 1 Hz s No Tripping 3 or 0 05 Hz s Time Delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or x25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Characteristic Times 1 Operation Time Pick Up 170 ms 130 ms Typical Overshoot Time 100 ms Reset Time 100 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 208C1 59 D Electric Protection Functions Presentation of tripping curve operation and settings for protection functions using m Definite Time m nverse Definite Minimum Time m Timer Hold 60 63230 216 208C1 General Tripping Curves Definite Time Protection The tripping time is constant and the time delay is started when the set point is exceeded tA MT10911 Definite Time Protection Principle Inverse Definite Minimum Time Protection The operation time depends on the protected value phase current ground fault current etc in accordance with standards IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 Operation is represented by a characteristic curve e g m t f I curve for the phase overcurrent function m t f Ir curve for the ground fault function Note The rest of the document is based on t f I the reasoning may be extended to other variables Ir etc The curve is defined by m Its type standard inverse very inverse extremely inverse etc
67. g o 5 gt T 86 ao MIS f used Ss 52 152 j 52 b Ta b f gt msc mc oso cmo m 341 Gm mm ee nr l Notes i N M7 M10 1 If Breaker Control is i l selected the usage of O1 O2 5 I j ES 52 lt 52 i 113 114 idi 112 must be as TC Gf Y cc i 2 If 112 is not connected to l I breaker A contact and 111 to a CE tert breaker B contact bkr status lights will be reversed and Trip Note jumper 1 recommended by MVS CB off line suprv TCS Circuit and Control Fault jumper 2 alternate monitor control power FU alarms may result FU Y 11 Sepam A10 L5 L8 Ll Ser40 or 20 O4 O4 O3 012 013 014 Relay 13 A14 A15 AMT Le Lo T L12 ln Self test Alarm Output Block Upstream Fast Trip Indication Outputs Watchdog Zone Seq Intlk If Used If Used 77 63230 216 208C1 Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Control and Monitoring Zone Selective Interlocking Functions ANSI Code 68 48 Description Operating Principle This function provides Sending of BI m Full tripping discrimination m A substantial reduction in delayed tripping of the circuit breakers located nearest the source which is a major drawback of the classical time based discrimination process Note The system applies to the definite time DT and inverse definite minimum time IDMT phase overcurrent and ground fault protection functions Level n 1 Sepam MT10195
68. in with CCA77x Cord Connected 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Check that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider MSA141 Analog Output Module Function The MSA141 module converts one of the Sepam measurements into an analog signal m Selection of the measurement to be converted by parameter setting m 0 10 mA 4 20 mA 0 20 mA analog signal according to parameter setting m Scaling of the analog signal by setting minimum and maximum values of the converted measurement o E g the setting used to have phase current 1 as a 0 10 mA analog output with a dynamic range of 0 300 A is Minimum value 0 Maximum value 3000 m Asingle module for each Sepam base unit to be connected by one of the CCA770 2 ft 0 6m CCA772 6 6 ft 2m or CCA774 13 1 ft 4m cords The analog output can also be remotely managed via the communication network Characteristics Weight 0 441 Ib 0 2 kg Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Operating Temperature Environmental Characteristics 13 to 4 158 F 25 to 470 C Same Characteristics as Sepam Base Unit
69. is to contain the data to be uploaded 3 Acknowledge the end of operation report Local Operation of Sepam Connected to Sepam SFT2841 offers all the local operating functions available in the advanced UMI screen plus the following functions m Setting of Sepam internal clock via the General characteristics tab Note The Sepam relay saves the date time in case the auxiliary power supply fails 24 hours m Implementation of the disturbance recording function via the OPG menu validation blocking of the function recovery of Sepam files start up of SFT2826 m Consultation of the history of the last 64 Sepam alarms with time tagging m Access to Sepam diagnostic data in the Sepam tab box included in Sepam diagnosis In Parameter setting mode the switchgear diagnostic values can be modified 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Use SFT2841 Setting and Operating Software Configuration of a Sepam Network Connection Window The SFT2841 software connection window is used to m Select an existing Sepam network or configure a new one m Set up the connection to the selected Sepam network m Select one Sepam unit from the network and access its parameters settings and operation and maintenance information Configuration of a Sepam Network Several configurations can be defined for the various Sepam installations A Sepam network configuration is identified by a name It is saved on the SFT2841 PC in a file in the SF
70. m FFFF represents 1 Format B Ix Rank i bit in the word with i between 0 and F B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 26 25 24 23 22 21 14 13 12 11 Examples F E D Logic Word Address 0105 Inputs Bit Address 105x TS1to Word Address 0101 TS16 16 15 14 Bit Address 101x 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TS49 to Word Address 0104 TS64 64 63 62 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Bit Address 104x TC1 to Word Address 01F0 TC16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit Address 1F0x STC1 to Word Address 01F1 STC16 16 15 14 18 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit Address 1F1x 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Format X Sepam Check Word This format applies only to the Sepam check word that may be accessed at the word address 100h This word contains various items of information relating to m Sepam operating mode m Time tagging of events Each data item contained in the Sepam check word may be accessed bit by bit from address 1000 for the bit bO to 100F for the bit b15 Bit 15 Event present Bit 14 Sepam in data loss status Bit 13 Sepam not synchronous Bit 12 Sepam time not correct Bit 11 Reserved Bit 10 Sepam in local setting mode Bit 9 Major fault in Sepam Bit 8 Partial fault in Sepam Bit7 Setting group A in service Bit6 Setting group B in service Bit 3 0 Mapping number 1 to 16 Other bits reserved undetermined values Status changes of bits 6 7 8 10
71. m Initial heat rise EsO is used to reduce the cold tripping time al IB 2 CE IB Es0 Modified Cold Curve 1 Ln E W A second group of parameters time constants and set points accounts for the thermal withstand of locked rotors when the current is greater than the adjustable set point Is Accounting for Negative Sequence Current In the case of motors with wound rotors the presence of a negative sequence component increases heat rise in the motor The current s negative sequence component is taken into account in the protection by the equation Ieq Iph Kx 12 Note Iph is the greatest phase current I2 is the negative sequence component of the current K is an adjustable factor with the following values 0 2 25 4 5 9 For an induction motor K is determined as follows Cd Ben 1 3 Cn Id 2 gx Ip Note Cn Cd rated torque and starting torque Ig Id basis current and starting current 9 rated slip Saving of Heat Rise The current heat rise value is saved in case of auxiliary power outage 63230 216 208C1 37 D Electric DE50243 Protection Functions Block Start The thermal overload protection can block the closing of the motor s control device until the heat rise drops to allow restarting This takes into account the heat rise produced by the motor when starting The blocking function is grouped together with the starts per hour protection and the message BlockStart is displayed Bl
72. mn mn mn mn mn Word3 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms Word4 m Y Years H 1 byte o Value from 0 99 o The monitoring control system must ensure the value 00 is greater than 99 m M Months H 1 byte o Value from 1 12 m D Days H 1 byte o Value from 1 31 m H Hours H 1 byte o Value from 0 to 23 m mn Minutes H 1 byte o Value from 0 59 m ms Milliseconds O 2 byte O Value from 0 59999 This information is encoded in binary form Sepam is time set via the write word function function 16 at the address 0002 with a mandatory 4 word time message The bits set to 0 in the description above correspond to format fields which are not used and not generated by Sepam Since these bits can be transmitted to Sepam with random values Sepam performs the necessary disabling but does not check the consistency or validity of the date and time received Synchronization Clock A synchronization clock is required for setting the date and time of Sepam Schneider Electric has tested the following equipment m Gorgy Timing Ref RT 300 Equipped with the M540 Module m Cyber Sciences Module STR 100 63230 216 208C1 101 D Electric Modbus Communication Time Tagging of Events Reading of Events Exchange Word Sepam provides the master or masters with two The exchange word is used to manage a special protocol to prevent loss of events event tables The master reads the event tab
73. motor the LTS timer initiates a trip if a start has been detected I gt Is or if the motor speed is zero For a normal start the input 123 zero speed switch disables this protection Motor Re Acceleration When the motor re accelerates it consumes a current in the vicinity of the starting current gt Is without the current first passing through a value less than 10 of lp The ST time delay which corresponds to the normal starting time may be reinitialized by a logic data input input 122 If the application does not have a zero speed switch motor re acceleration protection is disabled m Reinitialize the excessive starting time protection m Set the locked rotor protection LT time delay to a low value Note Starting is detected when the current consumed is 10 greater than the Ig current Note Is can be set at the motor current pickup for a mechanically locked rotor JAM event Block Diagram Tripping Output Locked Rotor Output Starting Time Output Locked Rotor at Output Input 123 Characteristics Is Set Point Setting Resolution Accuracy 1 Pick Up Drop Out Ratio ST LT and LTS Time Delays 50 lg lt Is lt 500 lg 196 5 93 5 5 Setting ST 500 ms lt T lt 300 s LT 50 ms lt T lt 300 s LTS 50 ms lt T lt 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Accuracy 1 2 or from 25 ms to 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2007
74. not reply 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Commissioning and Diagnosis Modbus Diagnosis Counters Counter Definition Sepam manages the Modbus diagnosis counters These are m CPT1 Number of valid frames received whether the slave is involved or not m CPT2 Number of frames received with a cyclic redundancy check CRC error or physical error frames with more than 255 bytes frames received with at least one parity overrun framing or line break error m CPT3 Number of exception responses generated even if not transmitted due to receipt of a broadcast request m CPT4 Number of frames specifically addressed to the station excluding broadcasting m CPT5 Number of valid broadcast frames received m CPT6 Not significant m CPT7 Not significant m CPT8 Number of frames received with at least one character having a physical error parity overrun framing or line break m CPT9 Number of valid requests received and correctly executed Counter Reset The counters are reset to 0 m When they reach the maximum value FFFFh 65535 m When they are reset by a Modbus command function 8 m When Sepam auxiliary power is lost m When communication parameters are modified Using the Counters Modbus diagnosis counters help to detect and resolve communication problems They can be accessed by the dedicated read functions Modbus protocol functions 8 and 11 CPT2 and CPT9 Counters Can Be Displayed on S
75. please consult your local Schneider Electric sales representative for more information 2 RTD fault message refer to Maintenance on page 204 3 According to parameter setting of the logic inputs 121 to 124 T20 T23 type 82 63230 216 208C1 Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE51148 Control and Monitoring Functions o o o 00 10 1 2006 12 40 50 PHASE FAULT 1A Tripla 162A A Triplb 161A Triple 250A a NET Alarm message on the advanced UMI 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved A Indications ANSI Code 30 Message Processing on the Advanced UMI Display When an event occurs the related message appears on the advanced UMI display The user presses the ra key to clear the message and consult the advanced UMI screens normally feso The user must press the y key to acknowledge latched events e g protection outputs The list of messages remains accessible in the alarm history Z amp key in which the last 64 messages are stored To delete the messages stored in the alarm history m Display the alarm history on the advanced UMI m Press the a key Signal Lamp Type Indication The 9 yellow signal lamps on the front of Sepam are assigned by default to the following events Signal Event Label on Lamp Front Panel LED 1 Tripping of Protection 50 51 Unit 1 I gt 51 LED 2 Tripping of Protection 50 51 Unit
76. protection setting zone is an exchange table which is used to read and set protections Modbus Protection Settings Word Address Access Function Enabled Setting Read Buffer 2000 207C Read 3 Setting Read Request 2080 Read Write 3 6 16 Remote Setting Request Buffer 2100 217C Read Write 3 16 See Protection Settings section 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 208C1 95 D Electric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Fault Recorder Zone The fault recorder zone is an exchange table which is used to read records Modbus Disturbance Recording Word Address Access Function Enabled Choice of Transfer Function 2200 2203 Read Write 3 16 Identification Zone 2204 2228 Read 3 Fault Rec Exchange Word 2300 Read Write 3 6 16 Fault Rec Data 2301 237C Read 3 See Fault Recorder section Test Zone The test zone is a 16 word zone that may be accessed via the communication link by all the functions in both read and write modes to facilitate communication testing at the time of commissioning or to test the link Modbus Test Zone Word Address Bit Address Access Function Format Enabled Test 0C00 C000 COOF Read Write 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16 none init to O OCOF COFO COFF Read Write 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16 none init to O Configuration Zone The configuration zone contains information pertaining to the hardware and software configuration of the Sepam Modbus Configuratio
77. settings Theoretically the Is current setting corresponds to the maximum continuous current It is generally the rated current of the protected equipment cable transformer The time delay T corresponds to operation at 10 Is on the curve This setting is determined while accounting for the constraints involved with the upstream and downstream protection devices The discrimination constraint leads to the definition of point A on the operation curve IA tA e g the point that corresponds to the maximum fault current for the downstream protection device 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved General Tripping Curves Problem 2 Given the type of inverse definite minimum time IDMT the Is current setting and a point k IK tk on the operation curve determine the time delay setting T On the standard curve of the same type read the operation time tsk that corresponds to the relative current Ik Is and the operation time Ts10 that corresponds to the relative current Is 10 The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve passes through the point k Ik tk is tk T T 10x 7 MT10215 Is Another Practical Method the Table of k Values on page 64 gives the values of K ts ts10 as a function of IIs In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay read the value K tsk Ts10 on the line for Ik Is The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curv
78. terminal of the contact linked to the chosen input being sure to comply with the suitable polarity and level Note Step 2 is not valid if the MET114E F is set for Vac input 3 Observe the change of status of the input using the SFT2841 software in the Input output indicator status screen 4 Atthe end of the test if necessary press the SFT2841 Reset key to clear all messages and deactivate all outputs Checking Logic Output Connections Procedure Test carried out using the Output relay test function activated via the SFT2841 software in the Sepam Diagnosis screen Only output O4 when used for the watchdog can be tested This function requires prior entry of the Parameter setting password 1 Activate each output relay using the buttons in the SFT2841 software 2 The activated output relay changes status over a period of 5 seconds 3 Observe the change of status of the output relay through the operation of the related switchgear if itis ready to operate and is powered or connect a voltmeter to the terminals of the output contact the voltage cancels itself out when the contact closes 4 Atthe end of the test if necessary press the SFT2841 Reset key to clear all messages and deactivate all outputs 200 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Commissioning Validation of the Complete Protection Chain Principle The complete protection chain is validated during the simulatio
79. the edges of the cut out plates to remove any Failure to follow this instruction can cause LPCT Type Current Sensors Test Accessories ACE917 Injection Adapter Function The ACE917 adapter is used to test the protection chain with a standard injection box when the Sepam relay is connected to LPCT sensors It is inserted between the standard injection box and the LPCT test plug either integrated in the Sepam CCA670 CCA671 interface connector or transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory The following are supplied with the ACE917 injection adapter m Power supply cord m 9 8 ft 3 m cord to connect the ACE917 to the LPCT test plug on CCA670 CCA671 or CCA613 Characteristics Power Supply 115 230 V AC Protection by Time Delayed Fuse 0 2 x 0 79 in 5 mm x 20 mm 0 25 A Rating CCA613 Remote Test Plug Function The CCA613 test plug flush mounted on the front of the cubicle is equipped with a 9 8 ft 3 m cord to transfer data from the test plug integrated in the CCA670 CCA671 interface connector on the rear panel of the Sepam relay Dimensions in g mm 2 66 A 67 5 ad Y x 1 73 0 51 j 44 T 13 60 3 15 80 Front View with Cover Lifted Right Side View 5 mm a I 2 72 69 Y 1 81 46 Cut Out Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 63230 216 208C1 139 D Electric PE50032 I
80. the readout of program logic data status m Readout of the status of 10 logic inputs Remote Control Commands Writing of 16 impulse type remote control commands TC in either direct mode or Select Before Operate SBO mode via 16 selection bits Other Functions m Reading of Sepam relay configuration and identification m Time tagging of events synchronization via the network or externally via logic input 121 time tagging within a millisecond m Remote reading of Sepam relay settings m Remote setting of protection units m Remote control of the analog output with MSA141 option m Transfer of disturbance recording data Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric Modbus Communication Characterization of Exchanges The Modbus protocol may be used to read or write one or more bits one or more words to the contents of the event counters or the contents of the diagnosis counters Modbus Functions Supported The Modbus protocol used by Sepam is a compatible sub group of the Modbus RTU protocol The functions listed below are handled by Sepam m Basic functions data access O Function 1 Reading of n output or internal bits Function 2 Reading of n input bits Function 3 Reading of n output or internal words Function 4 Reading of n input words Function 5 Writing of 1 bit Function 6 Writing of 1 word Function 7 High speed reading of 8 bits Function 8 Reading of diagnosis counters Function 11
81. tool Parameter setting of the inputs for AC voltage V AC setting blocks the Operating Time Measurement function Assembly Refer to the photo to the left 1 Insert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit 2 Flatten the module up against the base unit to plug it into the connector 2 3 Tighten the mounting screw 3 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Electric DE51685 Installation MES114 MES114E MES114F On Ci Na gt 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved MES114 Module I O Connection The inputs are potential free and the DC power supply source is external A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Wiring of connectors L M and IQ m Wiring with no fittings o 1 wire with maximum cross section of 0 00003 0 0039 i
82. used for all Sepam relay parameter setting local operation and customization functions The SFT2844 setting and operating software is supplied on CD ROM along with the SFT2826 program for recovering disturbance recording files the interactive introduction to the Sepam relay range and all the Sepam relay documentation in PDF format The CCA783 PC connecting cord ordered separately connects the PC to the port on the Sepam relay front panel so that the SFT2841 package can be used in point to point connected mode PE50336 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved G Electric PE50426 DE52069 DE52241 Use EI 27 7 x BE English US Welcome to SFT2841 your Sepam configuration software Do you want to Connection Series 20 Series 40 SFT2841 Welcome Window SFT2841 Connected to a Single Sepam Unit Series 80 Sepam Series 80 CCA783 Modem To supervisor Modem S LAN E LAN ACE969 ACE969 Sepam Series 20 Sepam Series 40 ACE969 xd SFT2841 Connected to a Sepam Network 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved SFT2841 Setting and Operating Software Welcome Window Description The SFT2841 welcome window opens when the progra
83. used to confirm the protection settings e e e e e e e e parameter settings and passwords 50 51 en 3 Trip Curve Si Threshold 550 A Delay 600 ms Key When there are no alarms on the Sepam display and the user is in the status protection or alarm menus the A key is used to move the cursor upward on SM b5 L5 b gt 5iN b gt gt SIN ext 0 off lon Trip MT10812 50 51 a 3 Trip Curve SIT Threshold 550 A Delay 600 ms Key When there are no alarms on the Sepam display and the user is in the status protection or alarm menus the v key is used to move the cursor downward on Bst L5 b gt 5IN b gt 51N ext YOoff lon Trip MT10812 50 51 Trip Curve SIT Threshold 550A Delay 600 ms 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 187 ectric Use Use of Passwords Sepam has two 4 digit passwords m The first password symbolized by a key is used to modify the protection settings m The second password symbolized by two keys is used to modify the protection settings and all the general settings The Factory Set Passwords for both are 0000 Entry of Passwords Press the key to display the following screen Passwords MT10816 Qu oS Que Press the e key to position the cursor on the first digit O X X X Scroll through the digits using the cursor keys A then confirm
84. 0 0 6625 0 6109 0 5658 145 2 6311 1 9518 1 5877 1 3463 1 1701 1 0341 0 9252 0 8356 0 7606 0 6966 0 6414 0 5934 150 3 2189 2 1855 1 7319 1 4495 1 2498 1 0986 0 9791 0 8817 0 8007 0 7320 0 6729 0 6217 155 2 4908 1 9003 1 5645 1 3364 1 1676 1 0361 0 9301 0 8424 0 7686 0 7055 0 6508 160 2 9327 2 1030 1 6946 1 4313 1 2417 1 0965 0 9808 0 8860 0 8066 0 7391 0 6809 165 2 3576 1 8441 1 5361 1 3218 1 1609 1 0343 0 9316 0 8461 0 7739 0 7118 170 2 6999 2 0200 1 6532 1 4088 1 2296 1 0908 0 9793 0 8873 0 8099 0 7438 175 3 2244 2 2336 1 7858 1 5041 1 3035 1 1507 1 0294 0 9302 0 8473 0 7768 180 2 5055 1 9388 1 6094 1 3832 1 2144 1 0822 0 9751 0 8861 0 8109 185 2 8802 2 1195 1 7272 1 4698 1 2825 1 1379 1 0220 0 9265 0 8463 190 3 4864 2 3401 1 8608 1 5647 1 3555 1 1970 1 0713 0 9687 0 8829 195 2 6237 2 0149 1 6695 1 4343 1 2597 1 1231 1 0126 0 9209 200 3 0210 2 1972 1 7866 1 5198 1 3266 1 1778 1 0586 0 9605 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 208C1 41 D Electric Protection Functions Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49RMS Setting Examples Cold Curves for Es0 096 Wg 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 4 20 4 40 4 60 Es 50 0 1579 0 1491 0 1410 0 1335 0 1090 0 0908 0 0768 0 0659 0 0572 0 0501 0 0442 0 0393 0 0352 0 0317 0 0288 0 0262 0 0239 55 0 1752 0 1653 0 1562 0 1479 0 1206 0 1004 0 0849 0 0727 0 0631 0 0552 0 0487 0 0434 0 0388 0 0350 0 0317 0 0288 0 0263 60 0 1927
85. 0 1818 0 1717 0 1625 0 1324 0 1100 0 0929 0 0796 0 069 0 0604 0 0533 0 0474 0 0424 0 0382 0 0346 0 0315 0 0288 65 0 2106 0 1985 0 1875 0 1773 0 1442 0 1197 0 1011 0 0865 0 075 0 0656 0 0579 0 0515 0 0461 0 0415 0 0375 0 0342 0 0312 70 0 2288 0 2156 0 2035 0 1924 0 1562 0 1296 0 1093 0 0935 0 081 0 0708 0 0625 0 0555 0 0497 0 0447 0 0405 0 0368 0 0336 75 0 2474 0 2329 0 2197 0 2076 0 1684 0 1395 0 1176 0 1006 0 087 0 0761 0 0671 0 0596 0 0533 0 0480 0 0434 0 0395 0 0361 80 0 2662 0 2505 0 2362 0 2231 0 1807 0 1495 0 1260 0 1076 0 0931 0 0813 0 0717 0 0637 0 0570 0 0513 0 0464 0 0422 0 0385 85 0 2855 0 2685 0 2530 0 2389 0 1931 0 1597 0 1344 0 1148 0 0992 0 0867 0 0764 0 0678 0 0607 0 0546 0 0494 0 0449 0 0410 90 0 3051 0 2868 0 2701 0 2549 0 2057 0 1699 0 1429 0 1219 0 1054 0 092 0 0811 0 0720 0 0644 0 0579 0 0524 0 0476 0 0435 95 0 3251 0 3054 0 2875 0 2712 0 2185 0 1802 0 1514 0 1292 0 1116 0 0974 0 0858 0 0761 0 0681 0 0612 0 0554 0 0503 0 0459 100 0 3456 0 3244 0 3051 0 2877 0 2314 0 1907 0 1601 0 1365 0 1178 0 1028 0 0905 0 0803 0 0718 0 0645 0 0584 0 0530 0 0484 105 0 3664 0 3437 0 3231 0 3045 0 2445 0 2012 0 1688 0 1438 0 1241 0 1082 0 0952 0 0845 0 0755 0 0679 0 0614 0 0558 0 0509 110 0 3877 0 3634 0 3415 0 3216 0 2578 0 2119 0 1776 0 1512 0 1304 0 1136 0 1000 0 0887 0 0792 0 0712 0 0644 0 0585 0 0534 115 0 4095 0 3835 0 3602 0 3390 0 2713 0 2227 0 1865 0 1586 0 1367 0 1191 0 1048 0 0929 0 0830 0 0746 0 0674 0 0612 0 0559 120 0 4317
86. 00 Vi p Accuracy 1 2 or 0 005 V p Resolution 1 Drop Out Pick Up Ratio 103 2 5 Time Delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy X296 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Characteristic Times Operation Time Pick Up 35 ms Typically 25 ms Overshoot Time lt 35 ms Reset Time lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 28 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Positive Sequence Undervoltage amp Phase Rotation Direction Check ANSI Code 27D 47 Operation Positive Sequence Undervoltage The protection picks up when the positive sequence component V1 of a 3 phase voltage system drops below the Vs1 set point with V1 Van Vbn x Vcn V1 Vabi x Vbc 2n VIL J3 and X e N3 m Includes a definite time delay T m Allows drops in motor electrical torque to be detected Phase Rotation Direction Check This protection detects the phase rotation direction and accounts for the fact that the phase rotation direction is inverted when the positive sequence voltage is less than 10 of Vi p and the phase to phase voltage is greater than 80 of V p with V Block Diagram N vi V1 Vs1 T9 Time Delayed Output m Pick Up Signal V1 lt 0 1 Vi Vab V gt 0 8 Vul Rotation Display or Van 1 Displays rotation instead of positive sequence voltage measurement Characteristics Vs1 Set Point
87. 00 Baud 38400 Baud 19200 Baud V34 modulation 19200 Baud 19200 Baud 9600 Baud V32 modulation 9600 Baud 9600 Baud Industrial Configuration Profile The following table shows the main characteristics of the modem on the Sepam side These characteristics match a configuration profile commonly known as an industrial profile as opposed to the configuration of modems used in offices Characteristics of the Industrial Profile Configuration AT Command Transmission in buffered mode without error correction WO force amp Q6 Data compression deactivated CO Line quality monitoring deactivated EO DTR signal assumed to be permanently off allows the modem amp DO connection to be established automatically on an incoming call CD signal off when carrier is present amp C1 All reports made to Sepam blocked Q1 Character echo suppression EO No flow control amp KO 180 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Use PE50591 Sepam Network Connected to SFT2841 PE50592 tie se 0 cs CV m CHANT era Co ge un On Fat J ML D coe ete te RO OMA Gus men NB D Coe mater SUA MIRA Lum UN an Ou Connected to a Communication Network 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved SFT2841 Setting and Operating Software Configuration of a Sepam Network Identification of Sepam Units Connected to the Communication Network The Sepam units conn
88. 00 mm fitted with a 0 16 in 4 mm ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm or 19 5 Ib in Connection of RTDs to Screw Type Connectors m 1 wire with cross section 0 00003 0 0039 in 0 2 2 5 mm AWG 24 12 W 2 wires with cross section 0 00003 0 0016 in 0 2 1 mm AWG 24 18 Recommended cross sections according to distance m Up to 330 ft 100 m gt 0 0016 in 1 mm AWG 18 m Up to 990 ft 300 gt 0 0023 in 1 5 mm AWG 16 m Up to 0 62 mi 1 km gt 2 5 mm AWG 12 Maximum distance between sensor and module 1 km 0 62 mi Wiring Precautions m Shielded cables are preferable o The use of unshielded cables can cause measurement errors which vary in degree according to the level of surrounding electromagnetic disturbance m Only connect the shielding at the MET1482 end in the shortest manner possible to the corresponding terminals of connectors A and m Do not connect the shielding at the RTD end Accuracy Derating According to Wiring The error At is proportional to the length of the cable and inversely proportional to the cable cross section At C 2x KM S mm m 2 1 C km for 0 93 mm cross section AWG 18 m 1 C km for 1 92 mm cross section AWG 14 63230 216 208C1 S ee 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Mt11009 DE80122 Installation MSA141 Analog Output Module MSA141 amp 1 70 mm 2 8
89. 003 0 0039 in 0 2 2 5 mm AWG 24 12 O 2 wires with maximum cross section of 0 00003 0 0016 in 0 2 1 mm AWG 24 18 O Stripped length 0 315 0 39 in 8 10 mm m Wiring with fittings o Recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 0 0023 in 1 5 mm AWG 16 DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 0 0016 in 1 mm AWG 18 o Cable length 0 32 in 8 2 mm O Stripped length 0 31 in 8 mm m The CCT640 must be grounded by green yellow wire ring lug on the screw 4 o Safety measure in case the CCT640 becomes unplugged g 2 E z 5 B E m Es a o 125 z 15 117 014 o o 9 olg 7018 o o 6 o12 Bl go o CSH 3 3 19 4 2113 zon 9 na Ho o 6 E M5 iz 3f 04 o jn 10 4 99 2 o Hu 126 lt 10 o 9 8 og E Ho D H4 pe o qt el la 12448 o ols o 7 Dis 2347 ol yo o 224 6 o o o 5 5 2 o j2 v o D n2 4 o oji o 2 o o 2 o a o p D maq TIS Te a Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Lp Electric PE50476 Installation MES114 Module 1 0 10 Inputs amp 4 Outputs Function The 4 outputs included on the Sepam Series 20 and 40 base unit This can be extended by adding an optional MES114 module with 10 inputs and 4 outputs available in 3 versions m MES11
90. 0145 0 0131 0 0084 0 0058 0 0043 0 0033 135 0 0604 0 0555 0 0457 0 0382 0 0325 0 0279 0 0243 0 0213 0 0189 0 0168 0 0151 0 0136 0 0087 0 0060 0 0044 0 0034 140 0 0627 0 0576 0 0474 0 0397 0 0337 0 0290 0 0252 0 0221 0 0196 0 0174 0 0156 0 0141 0 0090 0 0062 0 0046 0 0035 145 0 0650 0 0598 0 0491 0 0411 0 0349 0 0300 0 0261 0 0229 0 0203 0 0181 0 0162 0 0146 0 0093 0 0065 0 0047 0 0036 150 0 0673 0 0619 0 0509 0 0426 0 0361 0 0311 0 0270 0 0237 0 0210 0 0187 0 0168 0 0151 0 0096 0 0067 0 0049 0 0038 155 0 0696 0 0640 0 0526 0 0440 0 0374 0 0321 0 0279 0 0245 0 0217 0 0193 0 0173 0 0156 0 0100 0 0069 0 0051 0 0039 160 0 0720 0 0661 0 0543 0 0455 0 0386 0 0332 0 0289 0 0253 0 0224 0 0200 0 0179 0 0161 0 0103 0 0071 0 0052 0 0040 165 0 0743 0 0683 0 0561 0 0469 0 0398 0 0343 0 0298 0 0261 0 0231 0 0206 0 0185 0 0166 0 0106 0 0074 0 0054 0 0041 170 0 0766 0 0704 0 0578 0 0484 0 0411 0 0353 0 0307 0 0269 0 0238 0 0212 0 0190 0 0171 0 0109 0 0076 0 0056 0 0043 175 0 0790 0 0726 0 0596 0 0498 0 0423 0 0364 0 0316 0 0277 0 0245 0 0218 0 0196 0 0177 0 0113 0 0078 0 0057 0 0044 180 0 0813 0 0747 0 0613 0 0513 0 0435 0 0374 0 0325 0 0285 0 0252 0 0225 0 0201 0 0182 0 0116 0 0080 0 0059 0 0045 185 0 0837 0 0769 0 0631 0 0528 0 0448 0 0385 0 0334 0 0293 0 0259 0 0231 0 0207 0 0187 0 0119 0 0083 0 0061 0 0046 190 0 0861 0 0790 0 0649 0 0542 0 0460 0 0395 0 0344 0 0301 0 0266 0 0237 0 0213 0 0192 0 0122 0 0085 0 0062 0 0048 195 0 0884 0 0812 0 0666 0 0557 0 0473 0 0406 0 0353 0
91. 0188 0 0168 0 0151 0 0137 0 0125 130 0 1322 0 1221 0 1132 0 1054 0 0813 0 0651 0 0535 0 0449 0 0382 0 0330 0 0288 0 0254 0 0226 0 0202 0 0182 0 0165 0 0150 135 0 1560 0 1440 0 1334 0 1241 0 0956 0 0764 0 0627 0 0525 0 0447 0 0386 0 0337 0 0297 0 0264 0 0236 0 0213 0 0192 0 0175 140 0 1805 0 1664 0 1540 0 1431 0 1100 0 0878 0 0720 0 0603 0 0513 0 0443 0 0386 0 0340 0 0302 0 0270 0 0243 0 0220 0 0200 145 0 2055 0 1892 0 1750 0 1625 0 1246 0 0993 0 0813 0 0681 0 0579 0 0499 0 0435 0 0384 0 0341 0 0305 0 0274 0 0248 0 0226 150 0 2312 0 2127 0 1965 0 1823 0 1395 0 1110 0 0908 0 0759 0 0645 0 0556 0 0485 0 0427 0 0379 0 0339 0 0305 0 0276 0 0251 155 0 2575 0 2366 0 2185 0 2025 0 1546 0 1228 0 1004 0 0838 0 0712 0 0614 0 0535 0 0471 0 0418 0 0374 0 0336 0 0304 0 0277 160 0 2846 0 2612 0 2409 0 2231 0 1699 0 1347 0 1100 0 0918 0 0780 0 0671 0 0585 0 0515 0 0457 0 0408 0 0367 0 0332 0 0302 165 0 3124 0 2864 0 2639 0 2442 0 1855 0 1468 0 1197 0 0999 0 0847 0 0729 0 0635 0 0559 0 0496 0 0443 0 0398 0 0360 0 0328 170 0 3410 0 3122 0 2874 0 2657 0 2012 0 1591 0 1296 0 1080 0 0916 0 0788 0 0686 0 0603 0 0535 0 0478 0 0430 0 0389 0 0353 175 0 3705 0 3388 0 3115 0 2877 0 2173 0 1715 0 1395 0 1161 0 0984 0 0847 0 0737 0 0648 0 0574 0 0513 0 0461 0 0417 0 0379 180 0 4008 0 3660 0 3361 0 3102 0 2336 0 1840 0 1495 0 1244 0 1054 0 0906 0 0788 0 0692 0 0614 0 0548 0 0493 0 0446 0 0405 185 0 4321 0 3940 0 3614 0 3331 0 2502 0 1
92. 0309 0 0274 0 0244 0 0218 0 0197 0 0126 0 0087 0 0064 0 0049 200 0 0908 0 0834 0 0684 0 0572 0 0485 0 0417 0 0362 0 0317 0 0281 0 0250 0 0224 0 0202 0 0129 0 0089 0 0066 0 0050 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 208C1 43 D Electric Protection Functions Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49RMS Setting Examples Hot Curves Wg 1 00 1 05 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 Es 105 0 6690 0 2719 0 1685 0 1206 0 0931 0 0752 0 0627 0 0535 0 0464 0 0408 0 0363 0 0326 0 0295 0 0268 0 0245 0 0226 110 3 7136 0 6466 0 3712 0 2578 0 1957 0 1566 0 1296 0 1100 0 0951 0 0834 0 0740 0 0662 0 0598 0 0544 0 0497 0 0457 115 1 2528 0 6257 0 4169 0 3102 0 2451 0 2013 0 1699 0 1462 0 1278 0 1131 0 1011 0 0911 0 0827 0 0755 0 0693 120 3 0445 0 9680 0 6061 0 4394 0 3423 0 2786 0 2336 0 2002 0 1744 0 1539 0 1372 0 1234 0 1118 0 1020 0 0935 125 1 4925 0 8398 0 5878 0 4499 0 3623 0 3017 0 2572 0 2231 0 1963 0 1747 0 1568 0 1419 0 1292 0 1183 130 2 6626 1 1451 0 7621 0 5705 0 4537 0 3747 0 3176 0 2744 0 2407 0 2136 0 1914 0 1728 0 1572 0 1438 135 1 5870 0 9734 0 7077 0 5543 0 4535 0 3819 0 3285 0 2871 0 2541 0 2271 0 2048 0 1860 0 1699 140 2 3979 1 2417 0 8668 0 6662 0 5390 0 4507 0 3857 0 3358 0 2963 0 2643 0 2378 0 2156 0 1967 145 1 6094 1 0561 0 7921 0 6325 0 5245 0 4463 0 3869 0 3403 0 3028 0 2719 0 2461 0 2243 150 2 1972 1 2897 0 9362 0 7357 0 6042 0
93. 042 0 0029 0 0021 0 0016 70 0 0309 0 0284 0 0234 0 0196 0 0167 0 0144 0 0125 0 0110 0 0097 0 0087 0 0078 0 0070 0 0045 0 0031 0 0023 0 0018 75 0 0331 0 0305 0 0251 0 0211 0 0179 0 0154 0 0134 0 0118 0 0104 0 0093 0 0083 0 0075 0 0048 0 0033 0 0025 0 0019 80 0 0353 0 0325 0 0268 0 0225 0 0191 0 0165 0 0143 0 0126 0 0111 0 0099 0 0089 0 0080 0 0051 0 0036 0 0026 0 0020 85 0 0376 0 0346 0 0285 0 0239 0 0203 0 0175 0 0152 0 0134 0 0118 0 0105 0 0095 0 0085 0 0055 0 0038 0 0028 0 0021 90 0 0398 0 0367 0 0302 0 0253 0 0215 0 0185 0 0161 0 0142 0 0125 0 0112 0 0100 0 0090 0 0058 0 0040 0 0029 0 0023 95 0 0421 0 0387 0 0319 0 0267 0 0227 0 0196 0 0170 0 0150 0 0132 0 0118 0 0106 0 0095 0 0061 0 0042 0 0031 0 0024 100 0 0444 0 0408 0 0336 0 0282 0 0240 0 0206 0 0179 0 0157 0 0139 0 0124 0 0111 0 0101 0 0064 0 0045 0 0033 0 0025 105 0 0466 0 0429 0 0353 0 0296 0 0252 0 0217 0 0188 0 0165 0 0146 0 0130 0 0117 0 0106 0 0067 0 0047 0 0034 0 0026 110 0 0489 0 0450 0 0370 0 0310 0 0264 0 0227 0 0197 0 0173 0 0153 0 0137 0 0123 0 0111 0 0071 0 0049 0 0036 0 0028 115 0 0512 0 0471 0 0388 0 0325 0 0276 0 0237 0 0207 0 0181 0 0160 0 0143 0 0128 0 0116 0 0074 0 0051 0 0038 0 0029 120 0 0535 0 0492 0 0405 0 0339 0 0288 0 0248 0 0216 0 0189 0 0167 0 0149 0 0134 0 0121 0 0077 0 0053 0 0039 0 0030 125 0 0558 0 0513 0 0422 0 0353 0 0300 0 0258 0 0225 0 0197 0 0175 0 0156 0 0139 0 0126 0 0080 0 0056 0 0041 0 0031 130 0 0581 0 0534 0 0439 0 0368 0 0313 0 0269 0 0234 0 0205 0 0182 0 0162 0
94. 07 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Se 63230 216 208C1 3 lectric PE50297 PE50298 PE50593 Introduction Sepam is a modular solution Sepam with basic UMI and with fixed advanced UMI Example of an SFT2841 software screen 4 63230 216 208C1 Overview of Sepam Series 20 Protective Relays The Sepam Series 20 family of protection and metering units is designed for the operation of machines and electrical distribution networks of industrial installations and utility substations for all levels of voltage The Sepam Series 20 family consists of simple high performing solutions suited to demanding applications that call for current and voltage metering Sepam Series 20 Selection Guide by Application Selection Criteria Series 20 Metering I I V V Specific Protection Normal Normal Disconnection Functions Operation Breaker Falle Operation df dt Applications Substation 20 23 Transformer T20 T23 Motor M20 Bus B21 B22 Main Functions Protection m Overcurrent and ground fault protection with adjustable time reset m Overcurrent and ground fault protection with logically controlled switching between setting groups m Ground fault protection insensitivity to transformer switching m Detection of phase unbalance m RMS thermal protection that accounts for external operating temperature and ventilation operating rates m Rate of change of frequency protection df dt
95. 1 A CT o Make 2 turns through CSH primary m Connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 5 A CT OMake 4 turns through CSH primary CSH30 Parameters Residual Current Rated Residual Current Measuring Range 1ACT INr IN CT Primary Current 0 1 20 INr CT1A 21turns 5ACT INr IN CT Primary Current 0 1 20 INr CT 5A 4 turns CCA630 CT 1A 2 turns CT 5A 4 turns Description 181 19 85 Is2 18 t F o 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved The ACE990 is used as an interface between an MV zero sequence CT with a ratio of 1 n 50 n 1500 and the Sepam relay residual current input This arrangement allows the continued use of existing zero sequence CTs on the installation Parameters Residual Current Rated Residual Current Measuring Range ACE990 Range 1 Inr Ik n 1 0 1 20 INr 0 00578 k 0 04 ACE990 Range 2 Inr Ik n D 0 1 20 INr 0 0578 k 0 26316 1 n number of zero sequence CT turns k factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by Sepam relays Schneider 63230 216 208C1 131 D Electric Installation Base Unit Connection of Voltage Inputs B21 B22 Types DE51157 oO To Communication Network Interface To Optional Modules Connector Type Reference Cable A Screw CCA620 1 wire 0 0003 0 0039 in 0 2 2 5 mm Type AWG 24 12
96. 1 Software for PC 1 Start up the PC 2 Connect the PC RS232 serial port to the communication port on the front panel of Sepam using the CCA783 cord 3 Start up the SFT2841 software by clicking on the related icon 4 Choose to connect to the Sepam to be checked Identification of Sepam 1 Note Sepam serial number on label placed on the right side of the base unit 2 Note the Sepam type and software version using the SFT2841 software Sepam Diagnosis screen This information is also available on the advanced UMI in the Sepam general settings 3 Record these numbers on the test sheet Schneider 63230 216 208C1 193 D Electric Commissioning 194 63230 216 208C1 Checking Parameter and Protection Settings Determination of Parameter and Protection Settings All of the Sepam parameter and protection settings are determined beforehand by the design department in charge of the application and should be approved by the customer It is presumed that the study has been carried out with all the attention necessary or even consolidated by a network coordination study All of the Sepam parameter protection settings should be available at the time of commissioning m In hard copy format using the SFT2841 software the parameter and protection setting file for a Sepam relay can be printed or exported to a text file for editing m When applicable in the format of a file to be downloaded into Sepam using the SFT2841 software
97. 1 software installed m The communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 015 3 V p 1 Unit V or kV Accuracy 1 from 0 5 3 Vip 2 from 0 05 0 5 Vip 5 from 0 015 0 05 Vip Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 1 V or 1 Digit Refresh Interval 1 s Typical 1 V 4p primary rated phase to neutral voltage V p V p V3 Positive Sequence Voltage Operation This function gives the calculated value of the positive sequence voltage V1 Readout The measurement can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced UMI by pressing the K key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 05 1 2 V p 1 Unit VorkV Accuracy 2 at Vip Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 1 V or 1 Digit Refresh Interval 1 s Typical 1 V p primary rated phase to neutral voltage V p V p V3 Schneider 63230 216 208C1 15 D Electric Metering Functions 16 63230 216 208C1 Frequency amp Temperature Frequency Operation This function gives the frequency value measured via the following m Based on Vab if only one phase to phase voltage is connected to the Sepam relay m Based on positive sequence voltage if the Sepam relay includes Vab and Vbc measurements Frequency is not measured if m The voltage Vab or positive sequence voltage V1 is less t
98. 12 mi 1 8 km Description and Dimensions RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with aCCA612 cord 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active sending or receiving in progress 2 Rx female ST type connector Sepam receiving 3 Tx female ST type connector Sepam sending Connection m The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors m Fiber optics screw locked to Rx and Tx connectors The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a 9 8 ft 3 m CCA612 cord green fittings A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Check that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Installation ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi Protocol Interfaces Function The ACE969 multi protocol communication interfaces for Sepam Series 20 Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80 have two communication ports to connect a Sepam to two independent communication networks m The S LAN Supervisory Local Area Network port is used to connect Sepam to a communication network dedicated to supervision using o
99. 2 060 1 026 1 132 1 228 1 555 1 105 1 171 1 460 8 0 1 110 1 286 1 571 1 751 1 019 1 099 1 164 1 400 1 078 1 126 1 337 8 5 1 078 1 200 1 390 1 504 1 013 1 070 1 112 1 273 1 055 1 087 1 233 9 0 1 049 1 125 1 238 1 303 1 008 1 044 1 068 1 166 1 035 1 054 1 144 9 5 1 023 1 059 1 109 1 137 1 004 1 021 1 031 1 077 1 016 1 026 1 067 10 0 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 10 5 0 979 0 947 0 906 0 885 0 996 0 981 0 973 0 934 0 985 0 977 0 941 11 0 0 959 0 900 0 825 0 787 0 993 0 963 0 950 0 877 0 972 0 957 0 888 11 5 0 941 0 857 0 754 0 704 0 990 0 947 0 929 0 828 0 960 0 939 0 841 12 0 0 925 0 818 0 692 0 633 0 988 0 932 0 912 0 784 0 949 0 922 0 799 12 5 0 910 0 783 0 638 0 572 0 985 0 918 0 896 0 746 0 938 0 907 0 761 13 0 0 895 0 750 0 589 0 518 0 983 0 905 0 882 0 712 0 929 0 893 0 727 13 5 0 882 0 720 0 546 0 471 0 981 0 893 0 870 0 682 0 920 0 880 0 695 14 0 0 870 0 692 0 508 0 430 0 979 0 882 0 858 0 655 0 912 0 868 0 667 14 5 0 858 0 667 0 473 0 394 0 977 0 871 0 849 0 631 0 905 0 857 0 641 15 0 0 847 0 643 0 442 0 362 0 976 0 861 0 840 0 609 0 898 0 846 0 616 15 5 0 836 0 621 0 414 0 334 0 974 0 852 0 831 0 589 0 891 0 837 0 594 16 0 0 827 0 600 0 388 0 308 0 973 0 843 0 824 0 571 0 885 0 828 0 573 16 5 0 817 0 581 0 365 0 285 0 971 0 834 0 817 0 555 0 879 0 819 0 554 17 0 0 808 0 563 0 344 0 265 0 970 0 826 0 811 0 540 0 874 0 811 0 536 17 5 0 800 0 545 0 324 0 246 0 969 0 819 0 806 0 527 0 869 0 804 0 519 18 0 0 792 0 52
100. 23 MES114 Fern D Electric Commercial reference Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Electric Installation Equipment Identification List of Sepam Series 20 References Reference Description DSM303 Remote Advanced UMI Module SQ1S20A Substation Application Type S20 SQ1T20A Transformer Application Type T20 SQ1M20A Motor Application Type M20 SQ1B21A Bus Application Type B21 SQ1B22A Bus Application Type B22 SQ1S23A Substation Application Type S23 SQ1T23A Transformer Application Type T23 CCA634 Connector for 1 A 5 A CT 10 Current Sensors CCA630 Connector for 1 A 5 A CT Current Sensors CCA670 Connector for LPCT Current Sensors CCA640 Connector for VT Voltage Sensors CSH30 Interposing Ring CT for IO Input CSH120 Residual Current Sensor Diameter 4 7 in 120 mm CSH200 Residual Current Sensor Diameter 7 9 in 200 mm AMT852 Lead Sealing Accessory MET1482 MET1482 8 Temperature Sensor Module ACE9492 2 Wire RS485 Network Interface ACE959 4 Wire RS485 Network Interface ACE937 Optical Fiber Interface MES114 10 Input 4 Output Module 24 250 V DC MSA141 1 Analog Output Module ACE9092 RS485 RS232 Converter ACE919CA RS485 RS485 Interface AC Power Supply ACE919CC RS485 RS485 Interface DC Power Supply MES114E 10 input 4 Output Module 110 125 V DC and V AC
101. 3 4 16NS 1V Vbn Phase to Neutral Voltage x1 10A Read 3 4 16NS 1V Vcn Phase to Neutral Voltage x1 10B Read 3 4 16NS 1V Vr Residual Voltage x1 10C Read 3 4 16NS 1V V1 Positive Sequence Voltage x1 10D Read 3 4 16NS 1V Frequency 10E Read 3 4 16NS 0 01 Hz Vab Phase to Phase Voltage x10 10F Read 3 4 16NS 1V Vbc Phase to Phase Voltage x10 110 Read 3 4 16NS 1V Vca Phase to Phase Voltage x10 111 Read 3 4 16NS 1V Van Phase to Neutral Voltage x10 112 Read 3 4 16NS 1V Vbn Phase to Neutral Voltage x10 113 Read 3 4 16NS 1V Vcn Phase to Neutral Voltage x10 114 Read 3 4 16NS 1V Vr Residual Voltage x10 115 Read 3 4 16NS 1V V1 Positive Sequence Voltage x10 116 Read 3 4 16NS 1V Reserved 117 131 Read 3 4 init to O Reserved 132 1EF Prohibited Accuracy Examples The accuracy of the measurements depends on the 1 Unit 1A Accuracy 1 2 0 5A order of the unit it is equal to the value of the point U21 Unit 10 V Accuracy 10 2 2 5 V divided by 2 Remote Control Zone The remote control zone contains the pre assigned remote control bits TC The zone may be read or written using the word functions or bit functions see section on remote control commands Modbus Remote Control Bits Word Address Bit Address Access Function Format Enabled TC1 TC16 01FO 1F00 Read Write 3 4 6 16 B 1 2 5 15 3 4 6 16 STC1 STC16 01F1 1F10 Read Write 1 2 5 15 B Analog Output Control 01F2 Read Write 3 4 6 16 16S Protection Setting Zone The
102. 3 INr Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 0 1 A or 1 Digit 1 Inr rated current set in the general settings 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 excluding sensor accuracy Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved G Electric Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Average Current amp Peak Demand Current Average Current amp Peak Demand Current Operation This function gives m The average phase current RMS for each phase for each integration interval m The greatest average RMS current value for each phase since the last reset 1 The values are refreshed after each integration interval that can be set from 5 60 min Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced user machine interface UMI by pressing the amp 3 key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link Reset to zero by m Pressing the a key on the display when a peak demand current is displayed m Using the Clear command in the SFT2841 software m Using the remote control command TC6 with the communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 1 1 5 IN 2 Unit A or kA Accuracy Typically 1 9 2 from 0 3 1 5 IN 5 if 0 3 IN Display Format 4 3 Significant Digits Resolution 0 1 A or 1 Digit Integration Interval 5 10 15 30 60 min 2 I
103. 320 m 3300 ft 1000 m 10 590 ft 180 m 2500 ft 750 m 20 520 ft 160 m 1500 ft 450 m 25 410 ft 125 m 1200 ft 375 m Description and Dimensions 1 70 mm 2 8 in with CCA612 Cord Connected A and B Terminal blocks for network cable RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord 4 Wire Power Supply ACE959 RS 485 120r D Terminal block for a separate auxiliary power supply 12 V DC or 24 V DC Network 24V DC l B A B amp 1 Grounding terminal Tx 01 Tx 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active sending or receiving in ie xt progress 2 Jumper for 4 wire RS485 network line end impedance matching with load resistor Yt Rc 150 Q to be set to VA 7 m iC if the module is not at one end of the network default position m Rc if the module is at one end of the network Power Supply v 3 Network cable clamps DE80129 i T VE e inner diameter of clamp 0 24 in 6 mm Connection m Connection of network cable to screw type terminal blocks A and m Connection of the grounding terminal by a Tinned copper braid with cross section gt 0 0093 in 6 mm AWG 10 o Or cable with cross section gt 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 Length lt 7 9 in 200 mm fitted with a 0 16 in 4 mm ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm or 19 5 Ib in m The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold
104. 3230 216 208C1 Mg ee 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Modbus Communication Link Activity LED The ACE interface link activity LEDs are activated by variations in the signal on the Modbus network When the supervisor communicates with a Sepam relay during transmission or reception these LEDs flash After wiring check the information given by the link activity LEDs when the supervisor operates Note Flashing indicates that there is traffic passing to or from Sepam it does not mean that the exchanges are valid Functional Test If there is any doubt about correct operation of the link m Run read write shots in the test zone m Use Modbus diagnosis function 8 sub code 0 echo mode The Modbus frames below transmitted or received by a supervisor are an example of a test performed when communications are set up Test Zone Read Transmission 01 03 0C00 0002 C75B Reception 01 03 04 0000 0000 FA33 Write 01 10 0C00 0001 02 1234 6727 01 10 0C00 0001 0299 Transmission Reception Read Transmission 01 03 0C00 0001 875A Reception 01 03 02 1234 B533 Function 8 Modbus Diagnosis Echo Mode 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C Transmission Reception Even in echo mode the Sepam relay recalculates and checks the cyclic redundancy check CRC sent by the master m f the CRC received is valid Sepam replies m f the CRC received is invalid Sepam does
105. 4 Excessive Starting Time 16 Protection 66 nu Address Word 0102 TS17 to TS32 Bit Address 1020 to 102F TS Use S20 S23 T20 T23 M20 B21 B22 17 Protection 27D 47 Relay 1 L u 18 Protection 27D 47 Relay 2 19 Protection 27 Relay 1 20 Protection 27 Relay 2 21 Protection 27R 22 Protection 59 Relay 1 23 Protection 59 Relay 2 24 Protection 59N Relay 1 25 Protection 59N Relay 2 26 Protection 81H 27 Protection 81L Relay 1 28 Protection 81L Relay 2 29 Protection 27S Phase 1 30 Protection 27S Phase 2 31 Protection 27S Phase 3 32 Protection 81R 98 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Modbus Communication 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Data Addresses and Encoding Address Word 0103 TS33 to TS48 Bit Address 1030 to 103F TS Use S20 S23 T20 T23 M20 B21 B22 33 Protection 50BF Ci 34 Recloser in Service L 35 Recloser in Progress L L 36 Recloser Permanent Trip L L 37 Recloser Successful Trip L L 38 Send Blocking Input L L 39 Remote Setting Blocked L L L 40 Remote Control Blocked u Ci L 7 7 41 Sepam Not Reset After Fault L L L L 42 Remote Control Position Discrepancy u L 43 Matching Fault u L L L or Trip Circuit Supervision 44 Disturbance Recording Memorized L L 45 Contro
106. 4 10 inputs amp 4 outputs voltage 24 250 V DC m MES114E 10 inputs amp 4 outputs voltage 110 125 V AC or V DC m MES114F 10 inputs amp 4 outputs voltage 220 250 V AC or V DC Characteristics Weight 0 617 Ib 0 28 kg E Operating 13 to 158 F 25 to 470 C Temperature z 2 Environmental Same characteristics as Sepam base units gt Characteristics Voltage 24 250 VDC 110 125 V DC 110 V AC 220 250 V DC 220 240 V AC Range 19 2 275 V DC 88 150 V DC 88 132 V AC 176 275 V DC 176 264 V AC 10 input 4 output MES114 module Frequency 47 63 Hz 47 63 Hz Typical 3mA 3mA 3 mA 3mA 3 mA Consumption Typical 14 V DC 82 V DC 58V AC 154 V DC 120 V AC Switching Threshold Input State 1 gt 19 V DC 288 V DC 288 V AC z 176 V DC gt 176 V AC Limit State 0 lt 6 V DC lt 75 V DC lt 22VAC lt 137VDC lt 48V AC Voltage Isolation of Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Inputs from Other Isolated Groups Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 127 V DC 250 V DC Typical AC 100 240 V AC 47 5 63 Hz Continuous 8A 8A 8A 8A Current Breaking Resistive Load 8 4 A 0 7A 0 3A 8A Capacity L R Load 6 2 A 0 5A 0 2A lt 20 ms L R Load 4 1 A 0 2A 0 1A lt 40 ms p f load gt 0 3 5A Making lt 15 A for 200 ms Capacity Isolation of Enhanced Outputs from Other Isolated Groups Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 127 V DC 250 V DC Typical AC 100 240 V AC 47 5 63 Hz Continuo
107. 5 lectric MT10879 Protection functions Recloser ANSI code 79 Example 1 Case of successful reclosing after the first shot activation with 300 ms time delayed O C protection l l Instantaneous O C AEC o o l 300 ms Time Delayed O C TEM BN E NN l l l 112 Closed EHE um ug Ls l N I I Blocking Time Delay CB Open Eu M Jm 111 Open Position 4 gt Shot 1 Isolation Time Delay Disengagement 8 CB Close Command Time Delay l Reclosing in 7 l Progress TS35 l i Cleared Fault Reclosing PA l Message Successful TS37 i Example 2 Case of definitive tripping after two shots activated by 300 ms time delayed O C protection Instantaneous O C I b b S Lb l l l l 300ms p 300 ms lt gt 300 ms lt gt Time Delayed O C o OE S Jb Blocking Time 112 Closed Position Delay gt CB Open SEE Lid dL T Shot 1 Shot 2 111 Open Position l Isolation Time Isolation Delay l Time Delay gt CB Close GL p up u eee qL I Reclosing in Progress TS35 Permanent Fault Definitive Tripping Message TS37 56 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Overfrequency ANSI Code 81H or 810 Operation The protection function picks up when the positive seque
108. 67 144 Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Installation ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi Protocol Interfaces Description ACE969 Communication Interfaces ACE969TP ACE969FO Grounding terminal using supplied braid Power supply terminal block RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord 4 Green LED ACE969 energized 5 RedLED ACE969 interface status m LED off ACE969 set up and communication operational m LED flashing ACE969 not set up or setup incorrect m LED remains on ACE969 failed 6 Service connector reserved for software upgrades 7 E LAN 2 wire RS485 communication port ACE969TP and ACE969FO 8 S LAN 2 wire RS485 communication port ND DE51855 DE51856 ACE969TP 9 S LAN fiber optic communication port ACE969FO 2 Wire RS485 Communication Ports 1 2 wire RS485 network terminal block S LAN Port E LAN Port m 2 black terminals connection of 2 wire ACE969TP ACE969TP or ACE969FO RS485 twisted pair 2 M W 2 green terminals connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply 2 LEDs m Flashing Tx LED Sepam sending m Flashing Rx LED Sepam receiving 3 Clamps and recovery of shielding for two DE51863 DE51864 network cables incoming and outgoing inner diameter of clamps 0 24 in 6 mm 4 Fixing stud for network cable ties 5 Jumper for 2 wire RS485 network line end im
109. 8 134 4 4 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 5 For Isr 0 4 INr the minimum time delay is 300 ms If a shorter time delay is needed use the CT CSH30 or CT CCA634 combination 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Ground Fault ANSI Code 50N 51N or 50G 51G m Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves Ir gt Isr Time Delayed Output DE50248 Ir Isr Pick Up Signal 11 Value of Internal Time Delay Counter ripping Characteristics Tripping Curve Setting Is0 Set Point Definite Time Setting Definite Time DT Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT Chosen according to the list on the previous page 0 1 INr lt Isr lt 15 INr Expressed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 9 0 1 Inrs Isr lt 15 INr With CSH Sensor 2 A Rating 0 2 30 A 20 A Rating 2 300A CT 0 1 INr x Isr lt 15 INr min 0 1 A Zero Sequence CT With ACE990 0 1 INr Isr 15 INr Inverse Definite Minimum Time Time Setting 0 1 INr lt Isr lt INr Expressed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 0 1 INr lt Isr lt INr With CSH Sensor 2 A Rating 0 2 2A 20 A Rating 2 20A CT 0 1 INr Isr INr min O 1 A Zero Sequence CT With ACE990 0 1 INr x Isr lt INr Resolution 0 1 A or 1 digit Accuracy 2 5 or 0 01 INr Drop Out Pick Up Ratio Harmonic 2 Restraint Fixed threshold Time Delay T Ope
110. 841 Setting and Operating Software Presentation All the setting and operating functions are available on the screen of a PC equipped with the SFT2841 software tool and connected to the PC connection port on the front panel of Sepam run in a Windows 98 NT 2000 or XP environment SFT2841 serie 20 Sepam connected Operation All the data used for the same task are grouped together in the same screen to facilitate operation Menus and icons are used for fast direct access to the required information Current Operation m Display of all metering and operation data m Display of alarm messages with the time of appearance date hr min s m Display of diagnosic data such as tripping current number of switchgear operations and cumulative breaking current m Display of all the protection and parameter settings m Display of the logic status of inputs outputs and LEDs This software is suitable for occasional local operation meeting the needs of demanding personnel who require fast access to all the information Parameter and Protection Setting 1 al clslu al il m Display and setting of all the parameters of each protection function on the same page m Program logic parameter setting parameter setting of general installation and Sepam data m Input data can be prepared ahead of time and m CES transferred into the corresponding Sepam units in a c a single operation downloading function efi
111. 9 0 307 0 229 0 968 0 812 0 801 0 514 0 864 0 797 0 504 18 5 0 784 0 514 0 290 0 214 0 967 0 805 0 796 0 503 0 860 0 790 0 489 19 0 0 777 0 500 0 275 0 200 0 966 0 798 0 792 0 492 0 855 0 784 0 475 19 5 0 770 0 486 0 261 0 188 0 965 0 792 0 788 0 482 0 851 0 778 0 463 20 0 0 763 0 474 0 248 0 176 0 964 0 786 0 784 0 473 0 848 0 772 0 450 1 Values only suitable for IEC A B and C curves 64 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric MT10539 MT10528 Protection Functions Standard Inverse Time SIT Curve Very Inverse Time VIT or LTI Curve RI Curve General Tripping Curves Extremely Inverse Time EIT Curve Ultra Inverse Time UIT Curve t S A t A 100 00 1 000 004 3 Z A 1 1 i Y Y v V x 100 00 i Y Y x Y 10 00 y v Y A Y
112. 967 0 1597 0 1327 0 1123 0 0965 0 0839 0 0737 0 0653 0 0583 0 0524 0 0474 0 0431 190 0 4644 0 4229 0 3873 0 3567 0 2671 0 2096 0 1699 0 1411 0 1193 0 1025 0 0891 0 0782 0 0693 0 0619 0 0556 0 0503 0 0457 195 0 4978 0 4525 0 4140 0 3808 0 2842 0 2226 0 1802 0 1495 0 1264 0 1085 0 0943 0 0828 0 0733 0 0654 0 0588 0 0531 0 0483 200 0 5324 0 4831 0 4413 0 4055 0 3017 0 2358 0 1907 0 1581 0 1335 0 1145 0 0995 0 0873 0 0773 0 0690 0 0620 0 0560 0 0509 44 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49RMS Setting Examples Hot Curves Vp 4 80 5 00 5 50 6 00 6 50 7 00 7 50 8 00 8 50 9 00 9 50 10 00 12 50 15 00 17 50 20 00 Es 105 0 0023 0 0021 0 0017 0 0014 0 0012 0 0010 0 0009 0 0008 0 0007 0 0006 0 0006 0 0005 0 0003 0 0002 0 0002 0 0001 110 0 0045 0 0042 0 0034 0 0029 0 0024 0 0021 0 0018 0 0016 0 0014 0 0013 0 0011 0 0010 0 0006 0 0004 0 0003 0 0003 115 0 0068 0 0063 0 0051 0 0043 0 0036 0 0031 0 0027 0 0024 0 0021 0 0019 0 0017 0 0015 0 0010 0 0007 0 0005 0 0004 120 0 0091 0 0084 0 0069 0 0057 0 0049 0 0042 0 0036 0 0032 0 0028 0 0025 0 0022 0 0020 0 0013 0 0009 0 0007 0 0005 125 0 0114 0 0105 0 0086 0 0072 0 0061 0 0052 0 0045 0 0040 0 0035 0 0031 0 0028 0 0025 0 0016 0 0011 0 0008 0 0006 130 0 0137 0 0126 0 0103 0 0086 0 0073 0 0063 0 0054 0 0048 0 0042 0 0038 0 0034 0 0030 0 0019 0 0013 0 0010
113. A Li B2 HES 1 1 oi 1 11 u 1 D 3 og 1 11 2 1 1 Le 1 a 1 1 1 Bi HET n i i i O 1 NG T EN m Less JLlI JE ccc 1 Tas Fesses messes sell ses eee nee D Crests nr en ee nes Te 11 Sepam 11 Sepam r Sw 7 11 Sepam se semo ae sent ET a b 75 Schneider 63230 216 208C1 D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Circuit Breaker Contactor Control AC Main 3 Line ANSI Typical Control and Monitoring Functions SEPAM Series 20 40 APPLICATIONS REPRESENTED SEPAM SERIES 20 40 AC MAIN 3 LINE ANSI Typical SOURCE ALT GND FAULT CKT 2 a D C Zone Characteristics Application NC m O C Protection Metering Series 20 Series 40 EXCEPT B21 or B22 Feeder Non Dir O C I 20 Or 40 ALL Non Dir O C 1 V P E S40 1 Dir Grd O C 1 V P E S41 ipud qd Dir Ph amp Grd O C 1 V P E S42 zero Sequence cr i Motor Non Dir O C r M20 Dir Grd O C 1 V P E M41 Transformer Non Dir O C I T20 i Non Dir O C 1 V P E T40 en 11 Sepam PowerLogic Test Dir Ph amp Grd O C L V P E T42 CM or PM Sw Generator Non Dir O C 1 V P E G40 fes ee ee ane ee ee Bus Volt Freq v B21 Shorting TB Ne Volt Freq dF dt V B22 Note Typical Catalog Number for S42 use SP1S42A NOTES 1 IF 2 VT s connect a b c to Sepam Series 40 at E1 E2 E3 the wrong phase sequence will cause Rotation alarm and 47 Neg Seq O V operation
114. Control with Lockout Function ANSI 86 The ANSI 86 function traditionally performed by lockout relays can be performed by a Sepam relay using the predefined Circuit breaker contactor control function including latching of all tripping conditions protection function outputs and logic inputs With this function Sepam relays do the following m Group all tripping conditions and breaking device control m Latch the tripping command with closing linked until the cause of tripping ceases and is acknowledged by the user see Latching Acknowledgment on page 73 m Indicate the cause of tripping o Locally by signal lamps Trip and others and by messages on the display o Remotely by remote indications Schneider 63230 216 208C1 71 D Electric DE80110 DE80111 Control and Monitoring Functions 125 Pressure Drop SF6 1 T 0 126 Pressure Drop SF6 2 D IT 200 ms Protection Functions Validated for Tripping Overcurrent 121 122 123 114 124 121 123 Pressure Tripping External Tripping 1 External Tripping 2 External Tripping 3 External Tripping 4 External Tripping 5 Buchholz Tripping 122 Thermostat Tripping 123 Thermistor Tripping 126 Thermal Overload Block Thermal Overload 49 Tripping Open Command by Recloser Close Command 112 Device Closed Q 0 T Q mi 125 Remote Control Disable T 200 ms Close Command by Recloser Circuit Breaker Contactor Control
115. Directive EMC o 92 31 EEC Amendment o 93 68 EEC Amendment m 73 23 EEC Low Voltage Directive o 93 68 EEC Amendment UL A UL508 CSA C222 no 14 95 File E212533 CSA CSA C22 2 no 14 95 no 94 M91 no 0 17 00 File 210625 1 Except for communication 3 kV in common mode and 1 kV in differential mode 2 Except for communication 1 kVrms 3 Sepam must be stored in its original packing 63230 216 208C1 T 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Scbneider Electric Introduction 8 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents General Settings Characteristics Phase Current amp Residual Current Average Current amp Peak Demand Current Phase to Phase Voltage amp Phase to Neutral Voltage Residual Voltage amp Positive Sequence Voltage Frequency amp Temperature Tripping Current amp Negative Sequence Unbalance Disturbance Recording Running Hours Counter Operating Time amp Thermal Capacity Used Operating Time Before Tripping amp Delay After Tripping Starting Overload Current amp Starting Overload Time Number of Starts Before Blocking amp Block Start Time Delay Cumulative Breaking Current amp Number of Operations Operating Time amp Charging Time Schneider 63230 216 208C1 D Electric 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Metering Functions General S
116. E IEC Typical SOURCE E E Zone Characteristics Application ALT GND FAULT CKT 2 O C Protection Metering Series 20 Series 40 Relay Feeder Non Dir O C I S20 Sepam Series 20 Non Dir O C 1 V P E S40 IGA Dir Grd O C 1 V P E S41 be et ities ee eae dan f pun D Dir Ph amp Grd O C I V P E S42 an Motor Non Dir O C r M20 28er Dir Grd O C l V P E M41 zero sequence CT 11 Transformer Non Dir O C I T20 ALT GND FAULT CKT 1 Non Dir O C 1 V P E T40 Dir Ph amp Grd O C I V P E T42 J E N 3 Generator Non Dir O C 1 V P E G40 Q o gt Bus Volt Freq v B21 N A Volt Freq dF dt V B22 H T i 4 SL B6 N BB p 7 Note Typical Catalog Number for S42 use SP1S42A Xoxx 5A H H t NOTES o Al Ny D 1 a 1 IF 2 VT s connect a b c to Sepam Series 40 at E1 E2 E3 the wrong phase Sems i AL 1 BS B2 1 7 sequence will cause Rotation alarm and 47 Neg Seq O V operation H T T 1 L d M Ny E a AN E EOE E EE ETE EEE ee a 174 94 oe T eee Shorting TB ae p IN T NS i M 67 Trip Dir Test 11 Sepam PowerLogie Test i B6 ES i with Line zr Sw Ser 40 or 20 CM or PM Sw i i iF I selected and Sw daa ae ee E6 CT common o H ur toward Source ES B4 11E2 i i E3 as shown i Pg 7 IN W i L js del z n T TT T 1 T 7 s2 NI N
117. E937 Physical Layer Parameters L n Fiber Optic Parameters L Modbus Advanced Parameters n n E LAN Parameters Configuring the Physical Layer of the Modbus Port Asynchronous serial transmission is used with the following character format m 8 data bits m 1 Stop bit m Parity according to parameter setting The number of stop bits is always fixed at 1 If a configuration with Parity has been selected each character will contain 11 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1parity bit 1 stop bit If a No Parity configuration has been selected each character will contain 10 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the Modbus port are m Slave number Sepam address m Transmission speed m Parity check type Parameters Authorized values Default value Sepam Address 1 247 1 Speed 4800 9600 19200 or 19200 Baud 38400 Baud Parity None Even or Odd Even Configuring the ACE969FO Fiber Optic Port The configuration for the physical layer of the ACE969FO fiber optic port is completed with the following 2 parameters m Link idle state light on or light off m Echo mode with or without Fiber optic parameters Authorized values Default value Link Idle State Light Off or Light On Light Off Echo Mode Yes Fiber Optic Ring No or No Fiber Optic Star Note In echo mode the Modbus master will receive the echo of its own request before the slave s
118. E990 Range 2 7 5 VA Connection to Sepam Series 20 and Sepam Series 40 To residual current Ir input on connector A terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connection to Sepam Series 80 m To residual current Ir input on connector fe terminals 15 and 14 shielding m To residual current l r input on connector B terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended Cables m Cable between zero sequence CT and ACE990 less than 160 ft 50 m long m Sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid between the ACE990 and Sepam maximum length 6 6 ft 2 m m Cable cross section between 0 93 mm AWG 18 and 2 5 mm AWG 12 m Resistance per unit length less than 30 5 mQ ft 100 mQ m m Minimum dielectric strength 100 Vrms Connect the connection cable shielding in the shortest manner possible 2 in 5 08 cm maximum to the shielding terminal on the Sepam connector Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in the Sepam relay Do not ground the cable by any other means 63230 216 208C1 145 Installation 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or ins
119. FT2841 On the Sepam Diagnosis screen an incorrect speed or parity increments CPT2 and non reception is signaled by the lack of change on CPT9 Operating Anomalies To avoid confusing errors during commissioning connect each Sepam unit to the Modbus network one at a time Before connecting the next unit confirm that the supervisor is sending frames to the relevant Sepam unit by checking the activity on the RS232 RS485 converter or the fiber optic converter if there is one and on the ACE module Additionally depending on the network implementation check the following items RS485 Network m Wiring on each ACE module m Tightness of the screw terminals on each ACE module m Connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam base unit m Polarization is only at one point with impedance matching at both ends of the RS485 network m Auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969TP m ACE9092 or ACE919 converter used is connected powered and set up correctly Fiber Optic Network m Connections on the ACE module m Connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam base unit m Auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969FO m Converter or fiber optic star used is connected powered and set up correctly m For a fiber optic ring check that the Modbus master can handle the echo of its requests correctly In All Cases m All the ACE configuration parameters on SFT2841 m CPT2 and CPT9 diagnostic counters on t
120. Input for S23 Ic CSH Interposing Ring CT CT Int Ring ACE990 Timer Hold Delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m Definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves Ir gt Isr Time Delayed Output i Ir Isr Pick Up Signal Value of Internal Time Delay Counter Tr De i LT L Ti Poeno E o N 1 i 1 T1 T 1 1 2 10 20 Ir Isr Inverse Definite Minimum Time Protection Principle The Isr setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 Isr The tripping time for Ir Isr values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen 50 63230 216 208C1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Protection Functions 1 Inr In if the sum of the three phase currents is used for the measurement INr sensor rating if the measurement is taken by a CSH zero sequence CT Inr In of the CT if the measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5 A current transformer 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IECIEC SIT A 0 04 4 20 Very Inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 8 33 Very Inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 0 93 Ext Inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 15 47 IEEE Moderately Inverse 0 42 51 86 IEEE Very Inverse 0 73 90 57 IEEE Extremely Inverse 1 24 154 32 IAC Inverse 0 34 42 08 IAC Very Inverse 0 61 75 75 IAC Extremely Inverse 1 0
121. Insulation Class Setting T max 140 F to 392 F 60 C to 200 C Resolution 1 RMS Current Measurement Accuracy 5 Tripping Time Accuracy 1 2 oris Change of Setting Parameters By Current Threshold for Motor ame Is Set Point 0 25 8 lg settings to the other is controlled by logic input 126 By Digital Input for Transformer Switching is carried out without any loss of the thermal Input 126 capacity used value 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 8 Taking into Account Two Motor Operating Rates 2 Equipment manufacturer data Switching from one set of thermal settings to the other is controlled by m Logic input 126 m Overrun of a set point by the equivalent current The two groups of thermal overload protection parameters enable both operating rates to be taken into account Switching is carried out without any loss of the thermal capacity used value Block Diagram Input 126 Selection K ph TES Ip Calculation Heat Rise E Est A T of Equivalent E SEC leq At At arm Jinverse current leq rg T T Indication Ambient ue Correction Tripping Temperature by Ambient Input 126 Indication Temperature Block Start Block Closing Indication 38 63230 216 208C1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE50368 Protection Functions Example 1 In this example the following data are available m Time constants for on T1 and o
122. Main functions performed by SFT2841 m Modification of passwords m Entry of general characteristics ratings integration period etc m Setting Sepam relay date and time m Entry of protection settings m Changing of program logic assignments m Enabling disabling of functions m Saving of files ran Saving m Protection and parameter setting data can be saved m Printing of reports is possible as well Example of a phase overcurrent protection setting screen This software can also be used to recover disturbance recording files and provide a graphic display Operating Assistance Access from all the screens to a help section which contains all the technical data required for Sepam relay installation and use 1 Modes accessed via 2 passwords protection setting level parameter setting level 174 63230 216 208C1 SEES 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Use SFT2841 Setting and Operating Software General Screen Organization A Sepam document is displayed on the screen via a graphic interface that has conventional Windows features All the SFT2841 software screens are set up in the same way and include m A Title bar o Name of the application SFT2841 o Identification of the Sepam document displayed n Window manipulation handles 5epamBsy2 m B Menu bar i NE C SEE o To access all SFT2841 software functions j o Unavailable functions are dimmed m C Toolbar o Group of contextual ic
123. Measured by VT Vab Vbc Residual Voltage None Functions Available Voltages Measured Van Vbn Vcn Values Calculated Vca V1 f Measurements Available Vab Vbc Vca V1 f Protection Functions Available According to type of Sepam Relay All Except 59N 27S Parameters Voltages measured by VT Vab Residual Voltage External VT Functions Available Voltages Measured Vab Vr Values Calculated f Measurements Available Vab Vr f Protection Functions Available According to Type of Sepam Relay All Except 47 27D 27S 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Parameters Voltages Measured by VT Vab Residual Voltage None Functions Available Voltages Measured Vab Values Calculated f Measurements Available Vab f Protection Functions Available According to Type of Sepam Relay All Except 47 27D 59N 27S D Electric 63230 216 208C1 133 Installation 134 120R302 63230 216 208C1 1 A 5 A Current Transformers Function Sepam relays can be connected to any standard 1 A or 5 A current transformer Schneider Electric offers a range of current transformers to measure primary currents from 50 A to 2500 A Please consult your local Schneider Electric sales representative for further information Sizing of Current Transformers The current transformers should be large enough to minimize saturation CT s
124. N rated current set in the general settings 3 at IN in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 4 Display of values 0 02 40 IN Schneider 63230 216 208C1 13 D Electric Metering Functions 14 63230 216 208C1 Phase to Phase Voltage amp Phase to Neutral Voltage Phase to Phase Voltage Operation This function gives the phase RMS value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of the phase to phase voltages Vab Vbc Vca according to voltage sensor connections based on the measurement of the fundamental component m Vab Voltage between phases a and b m Vbc Voltage between phases b and c m Vca Voltage between phases c and a Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced user machine interface UMI by pressing the key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link m Ananalog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement Range 0 05 1 2 Vj p 1 Unit V or kV Accuracy 1 from 0 5 1 2 Vp 2 from 0 05 0 5 Vip Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 1 V or 1 Digit Refresh Interval 1 s Typical 1 VN nominal rating set in the general settings 2 At VLN in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Phase to Neutral Voltage Operation This function gives the RMS value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of the phase to neutral voltages based on the measurement of the fundamental com
125. Nr The table below can be used to determine m The 2 ACE990 input terminals to be connected to the MV zero sequence CT secondary m The type of residual current sensor to set m The exact value of the rated residual current INr setting o Defined by the following formula INr k x number of zero sequence CT turns o k factor defined in the table below The zero sequence CT must be connected to the interface in the right direction for correct operation the MV zero sequence CT secondary output terminal S1 must be connected to the terminal with the lowest index Ex K Value ACE990 Input Residual Current Min MV Zero Terminals to be Sensor Setting Sequence CT Connected Power 0 00578 E1 E5 ACE990 Range 1 0 1 VA 0 00676 E2 E5 ACE990 Range 1 0 1 VA 0 00885 E1 E4 ACE990 Range 1 0 1 VA 0 00909 E3 E5 ACE990 Range 1 0 1 VA 0 01136 E2 E4 ACE990 Range 1 0 1 VA 0 01587 E1 E3 ACE990 Range 1 0 1 VA 0 01667 E4 E5 ACE990 Range 1 0 1 VA 0 02000 E3 E4 ACE990 Range 1 0 1 VA 0 02632 E2 E3 ACE990 Range 1 0 1 VA 0 04000 E1 E2 ACE990 Range 1 0 2 VA 0 05780 E1 E5 ACE990 Range 2 2 5 VA 0 06757 E2 E5 ACE990 Range 2 2 5 VA 0 08850 E1 E4 ACE990 Range 2 3 0 VA 0 09091 E3 E5 ACE990 Range 2 3 0 VA 0 11364 E2 E4 ACE990 Range 2 3 0 VA 0 15873 E1 E3 ACE990 Range 2 4 5 VA 0 16667 E4 E5 ACE990 Range 2 4 5 VA 0 20000 E3 E4 ACE990 Range 2 5 5 VA 0 26316 E2 E3 AC
126. Point 0 1A 12 Group B Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 13 Group B Timer Hold Curve 3 14 Group B Timer Hold Delay 10 ms 15 Group B H2 Restraint 4 16 Reserved ANSI 59 Phase to Phase Overvoltage Function Number 11xx Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or Disabled D 2 Vs Set Point Vp 3 Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 4to 8 Reserved ANSI 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement Function Number 12xx Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or Disabled 2 Vsr Set Point Vp 3 Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 4 8 Reserved ANSI 66 Starts per Hour Function Number 0701 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or Disabled D 2 Period of Time hrs 3 Total Number of Starts 1 4 Number of Consecutive Hot Starts 1 5 Number of Consecutive Starts 1 6 Time Delay between Starts min 63230 216 208C1 113 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider d Electric Modbus Communication 114 63230 216 208C1 Access to Remote Settings ANSI 79 Recloser Function Function Number 1701 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Recloser Enabled or Disabled 2 Recloser Blocked by Input 126 9 3 Number of Shots 1 4 4 Recloser Reclaim Time Delay 10 ms 5 Recloser Blocking Time Delay 10 ms 6 Reserved 7 Step 1 Activation Mode 43 8 Step 1 Isolation Time Delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Ste
127. Receipt Block Diagram Sepam M20 Overcurrent i Inst Relay 1 Group A Inst Relay 2 Group A Ground Fault Inst Relay 1 Group A Inst Relay 2 Group A Output Oxx 1 BI Transmission To BI Transmission Blocking of BI Transmission Overcurrent Time Delayed Relay 1 Group B Time Delayed Relay 2 Group B Ground Fault Tripping Time Delayed Relay 1 Group B Time Delayed Relay 2 Group B 1 According to parameter setting O3 by default 2 Instantaneous action inst corresponds to protection pick up signal information 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 lectric 79 Control and Monitoring Functions 80 63230 216 208C1 Disturbance Recording Triggering Description Analog and logic signals can be recorded based on triggering events control matrix parameter settings or manual action m Triggering by the grouping of all pick up signals of the protection functions in service m Triggering by the delayed outputs of selected protection functions m Triggering by selected logic inputs m Manual triggering by a remote control TC10 m Manual triggering by the SFT2841 software tool Disturbance recording may be m Blocked by the SFT2841 software or by remote control TC8 m Validated by the SFT2841 software or by remote control TC9 Block Diagram Disturbance Recording Triggering According to Chosen Protection Functions Delayed Output DE51139
128. Relay Outputs 01 O2 O11 Contacts 2 Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 125 V DC 250 V DC AC 47 5 to 63 Hz 100 240 V AC Continuous Current 8A 8A 8A 8A Breaking Capacity Resistive Load 8 4 A 0 7A 0 3A L R Load lt 20 ms 6 2 A 0 5A 0 2A L R Load lt 40 ms 41A 0 2A 01A Resistive Load 8A p f Load 0 8 5A Making Capacity 30 A for 200 ms Isolation of Outputs in Relation to Enhanced Other Isolated Groups Annunciation Relay Outputs O3 O4 O12 O13 O14 Contacts Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 125 V DC 250 V DC AC 47 5 63 Hz 100 240 V AC Continuous Current 2A 2A 2A 2A Breaking Capacity L R Load 20 ms 2A A 0 5A 0 15 A p f Load gt 0 3 1A Isolation of Outputs in Relation to Enhanced Other Isolated Groups Voltage 24 250 V DC 110 240 V AC Range 20 10 20 10 47 5 63 Hz Deactivated Burden 1 lt 45W lt 9 VA Maximum Burden 1 lt 8W 15 VA Inrush Current lt 10 A for 10 ms 28 A for 100 us lt 15 A for First Cycle Acceptable Momentary Outages 10 ms 10 ms Current 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 0 10 mA Load Impedance lt 600 Q Including Wiring Accuracy 0 50 1 According to configuration 2 Relay outputs O1 O2 O11 contact comply with clause 6 7 of standard C37 90 30 A 200 ms 2000 operations 6 63230 216 208C1 Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserve
129. Relay Tripping Curve Starting at 65 ViLN Starting at 80 ViLN Starting at 100 VN In order to take these curves into account the second thermal overload relay may be used The time constant in this case is in theory the shortest one However it should not be determined in the same way as that of the first relay The thermal overload protection switches between the first and second relay if the equivalent current leq exceeds the Is value set point current 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Protection Functions Cold Curves for Es0 096 Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49RMS Setting Examples Wg 1 00 1 05 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 Es 50 0 6931 0 6042 0 5331 0 4749 0 4265 0 3857 0 3508 0 3207 0 2945 0 2716 0 2513 0 2333 0 2173 0 2029 0 1900 0 1782 0 1676 55 0 7985 0 6909 0 6061 0 5376 0 4812 0 4339 0 3937 0 3592 0 3294 0 3033 0 2803 0 2600 0 2419 0 2257 0 2111 0 1980 0 1860 60 0 9163 0 7857 0 6849 0 6046 0 5390 0 4845 0 4386 0 3993 0 3655 0 3360 0 3102 0 2873 0 2671 0 2490 0 2327 0 2181 0 2048 65 1 0498 0 8905 0 7704 0 6763 0 6004 0 5379 0 4855 0 4411 0 4029 0 3698 0 3409 0 3155 0 2929 0 2728 0 2548 0 2386 0 2239 70 1 2040 1 0076 0 8640 0 7535 0 6657 0 5942 0 5348 0 4847 0 4418 0 4049 0 3727 0 3444 0 3194 0 2972 0 2774 0 2595 0 2434 75 1 3863 1 1403 0 9671 0
130. Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved MT10858 MT10419 Protection Functions Description This function is used to protect equipment motors transformers generators lines and capacitors against overloads Operation Curve The protection gives a trip command when the heat rise E calculated according to the measurement of an equivalent current leq is greater than the set point Es lg is the base current typically set to the motor FLA The greatest permissible continuous current is I IBJEs The protection tripping time is set by the time constant T m The calculated heat rise depends on the current consumed and the previous heat rise state m The cold curve defines the protection tripping time based on zero heat rise m The hot curve defines the protection tripping time based on 100 nominal heat rise 10 Cold Curve e e IB 10 T Ies us IB 107 10 Hot Curve m 1 NS 3 Ln n e IB Alarm Set Point Tripping Set Point Two set points for heat rise m Est Alarm a m Es2 Tripping Imax Ig if the max operating conditions are unknown use SF x FLA for Imax Hot State Set Point When the function is used to protect a motor this fixed set point is designated for the detection of the hot state used by the number of starts function Heat Rise and Cooling Time Constants Heat Rise Time Constant Cooling Time Constant 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved T2 t
131. Sepam Series 20 Protective Relays User s Manual Instruction Bulletin 63230 216 208C1 Retain for future use 1 on Q fiesta ssh lo35IN Io StN ed NL ETE D SEPAM DIGITAL RELAY nn Schneider Be Telemecanique iP Electric ANSI symbol 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved IEC symbol Safety Instructions Safety symbols and messages Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install operate service or maintain it The following special messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure Risk of electric shock The addition of either symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label on a device indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in death or personal injury if the instructions are not followed Safety alert This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards and prompt you to consult the manual Obey all safety instructions that follow this symbol in the manual to avoid possible injury or death Safety messages DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death serious injury or property damage A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could res
132. Supply External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 Power Consumption 16 mA in Receiving Mode 40 mA in Sending Mode Max Number of Sepam Units 25 Maximum Length of 2 Wire RS485 Network Number of Sepam Units With Distributed Power Supply 12 V DC 24 V DC 5 1000 ft 320 m 3300 ft 1000 m 10 590 ft 180 m 2500 ft 750 m 20 430 ft 130 m 1500 ft 450 m 25 410 ft 125 m 1200 ft 375 m Fiber Optic Interface Fiber Type Graded Index Multimode Silica Wavelength 820 nm Invisible Infrared Type of Connector ST BFOC Bayonet Fiber Optic Connector Maximum Length of Fiber Optic Network Fiber Diameter Numerical Minimum Optical Power Maximum Fiber Attenuation um Aperture NA dBm km Available dBm Length 50 125 0 2 2 7 5 6 2300 ft 700 m 62 5 125 0 275 3 2 9 4 5900 ft 1800 m 100 140 0 3 4 14 9 9200 ft 2800 m 200 HCS 0 37 6 19 2 8500 ft 2600 m Maximum length calculated with m Minimum optical power available m Maximum fiber attenuation m Losses in 2 ST connectors 0 6 dBm m Optical power margin 3 dBm according to IEC 60870 standard Example for a 62 5 125 um fiber Lmax 9 4 3 0 6 3 2 1 12 mi 1 8 km Dimensions in a mm E a ACE969TP e non B B EROR B 60 6 ner len pese of amp 5
133. T2841 installation directory default C Program Files Schneider SFT2841 Net Configuration of a Sepam network is a two part process m Configuration of the communication network m Configuration of the Sepam units Configuration of the Communication Network To configure the communication network first define m The type of link between the PC and the Sepam network m The communication parameters according to the type of link selected o Direct serial link o Link via Ethernet TCP IP o Link via telephone modem Network connection Network configuration PE50603 Edt E Comsesm LS net er Configuration windows for the communication network according to the type of link serial link modem link STN or Ethernet link TCP 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 177 ectric PE50588 PE50589 Use SFT2841 Setting and Operating Software Configuration of a Sepam Network ppm a Direct Serial Link The Sepam units are connected to an RS485 or fiber optic multidrop network Depending on the serial link interfaces available on the PC the PC itself will be connected either directly to the RS485 network or fiber optic HUB or via an RS232 RS485 converter or fiber optic converter Define these parameters m Port o Communication port used on the PC m Speed o 4800 Baud o 9600 Baud o 19200 Baud Configuration Window for the Serial Link H 38400 Baud Communication Network m Pa
134. acy 5 1 Digit Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 0 1 A or 1 Digit 1 IN Inr rated current set in the general settings Negative Sequence Unbalance Operation This function gives the negative sequence component T I2 lg The negative sequence current is based on the phase currents m 3 Phases gt 1 25 22 2 2 3 x Qa x Ib xIc 2m 13 with X e m 2 Phases gt 1 gt 2 I2 x Ia x Ic 3 2m 13 with X e Note These two formulas are equivalent when there is no ground fault Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced UMI by pressing the amp key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 10 500 Unit lg Accuracy 2 Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 1 Refresh Interval 1 s Typical 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 17 ectric Network Diagnosis Functions 18 63230 216 208C1 MT 10181 Schneider D Electric Disturbance Recording Disturbance Recording Operation This function is used to record analog signals and logical states The Storage function is initiated based on parameter settings by a triggering event see Disturbance Recording Triggering on page 80 Recording begins before the triggering event and continues afterward Note The event record is 86 cy
135. al Current Measuring Range Sum of 3 Is INr IN CT primary current 0 1 40 INr Description Arrangement recommended for the protection of isolated or compensated neutral Systems in which very low fault currents need to be detected Parameters Residual Current Rated Residual Current Measuring Range 2 A rating CSH INr 2 A 0 2 40 A 20 A rating CSH INr 20 A 2 400 A Description Residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs m Terminal 7 1 A CT m Terminal 8 5 A CT Parameters Residual Current Rated Residual Current Measuring Range 1ACT Inr In CT primary current 0 1 20 Inr 5ACT Inr In CT primary current 0 1 20 Inr Note Inr should be thought of as a relay input port for ground fault protection This port can accept residually connected phase CT and therefore measure positive negative and zero sequence components This port can also accept a zero sequence CT that measures only true zero sequence no positive or negative sequence So INr is only a port name the kind of current positive negative or zero sequence depends on the type of CT used Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE80115 DE80116 DE51830 Installation Base Unit Other Current Input Connection Schemes Description The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to a Sepam relay to measure residual current m Connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to
136. alified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional ground m Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Wiring of the CCA620 connector m Without fitting o 1 wire with maximum cross section of AWG 24 12 0 2 2 5 mm or 2 wires with maximum cross section of AWG 24 18 0 2 1 mm O Stripped length 0 31 0 39 in 8 10 mm m With fitting o Recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 0 0023 in 1 5 mm AWG 16 DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 0 0016 in 1 mm AWG 18 a Cable length 0 32 in 8 2 mm a Stripped length 0 31 in 8 mm Wiring of the CCA622 connector m Ring lug connectors 1 4 in 6 35 mm Characteristics of the 4 base unit relay outputs O1 O2 O3 O4 m O1 and C2 are 2 control outputs used by the breaking device control function for o O1 Breaking device tripping o O2 Breaking device block closing m O3 and O4 are indication outputs only O4 can b
137. alled modem Configure it via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal the configuration tool that may have Phone modem 4 been supplied with the modem or by setting switches see the modem ci manufacturer s manual mn Modem RS485 Interface mem peres In general the configuration parameters for the modem s RS485 interface must be wo defined in accordance with the Sepam communication interface configuration m Speed o 4800 Baud o 9600 Baud o 19200 Baud o 38400 Baud Configuration Window for the Communication network via m Character Format Telephone Modem 08 data bits 1 stop bit parity none even odd Telephone Network Interface Modern modems offer sophisticated features such as checking the quality of the telephone line error correction and data compression These options are not appropriate for communication between SFT2841 and Sepam which is based on the Modbus RTU protocol Their effect on communication performance may be the opposite of the expected result It is therefore highly advisable to m Disable the error correction data compression and telephone line quality monitoring options m Use the same end to end communication speed between the n Sepam network and the called modem a Called modem Sepam side and the calling modem PC side n PC and the calling modem see recommended configurations table Sepam Network Telephone Network PC Modem Interface 38400 Baud V34 modulation 336
138. ards Type 1 MT10903 Is Inverse Definite Minimum Time Protection Principle 1 12 10 20 DE50371 MT10541 Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 50 51 The Is setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 Is The tripping time for I Is values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of Curve Type Standard Inverse Time SIT 1 2 Very Inverse Time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely Inverse Time EIT 1 2 Ultra Inverse Time UIT 1 2 RI Curve 1 IEC Standard Inverse Time SIT A IEC Very Inverse Time VIT or LTI B IEC Extremely Inverse Time EIT C IEEE Moderately Inverse IEC D IEEE Very Inverse IEC E IEEE Extremely Inverse IEC F IAC Inverse IAC Very Inverse IAC Extremely Inverse 1 Note The curve equations are given in IDMT protection functions page 61 The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m f gt 20s tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is m f gt 40 IN tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 IN Note IN current transformer rated current is defined when the general settings are made Block Diagram Timer Hold Delay Pick Up Signal and to Logic Discrimination The function includes an adjustable timer ho
139. are operated locally Setting and operating software The SFT2841 PC software tool gives access to all the Sepam relay functions with the convenience of a Windows environment Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Gf Electric Introduction Selection Table Protection ANSI Code S20 S23 T20 T23 M20 B21 9 B22 Phase Overcurrent 50 51 4 4 4 4 4 Ground Fault 50N 51N Sensitive Ground Fault 50G 51G t ij 1 Breaker Failure 50BF 1 1 Negative Sequence Current Unbalance 46 1 1 1 1 1 Thermal Overload 49RMS 2 2 2 Phase Undercurrent 37 1 Locked Rotor Excessive Starting Time 48 51LR 14 1 Starts per Hour 66 1 Positive Sequence Undervoltage 27D 47 2 2 Remanent Undervoltage 27R 1 1 Phase to Phase Undervoltage 27 2 2 Phase to Neutral Undervoltage 278 1 1 Phase to Phase Overvoltage 59 2 2 Neutral Voltage Displacement 59N 2 2 Overfrequency 81H 1 1 Underfrequency 81L 2 2 Rate of Change of Frequency df dt 81R 1 Recloser 4 Shots 79 u o Thermostat Buchholz 26 63 u u Temperature Monitoring 38 49T u u o 8 Sensors 2 Set Points per Sensor Metering Phase Current RMS la Ib Ic Residual Current Ir en Ibmax Icmax a z x z Voltage Vab Vbc Vca Van Vbn Vcn Residual Voltage Vr Positive Sequence Voltage V1 L L Frequency L n Temperature o o Hu Network and Machine Diagnosis
140. ation given by the device connected to the analog output 202 63230 216 208C1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Commissioning Test Sheet Sepam Series 20 PfOoJect se Type of Sepam Switchboard ir Serial Number eJ d ene Software Version V Type of Check Preliminary General Examination Prior to Energizing o Energizing o Parameter and Protection Settings o Logic Input Connection o Logic Output Connection o Validation of the Complete Protection Chain o Analog Output Connection to the MSA141 Module o Temperature Sensor Input Connection to the MET1482 Module for Type T20 T23 or M20 o Type of Check Test Performed Result Display Phase Current Input Secondary Injection of CT rated primary current Connection CT Rated Current e E o ie 1 Aor5A bein le minui Residual Current Value Secondary Injection of CT Rated Primary Current Obtained by 3 Phase CT CT Rated Current ll sessi o ie 1 Aor5A Residual Current Input Injection of 5 A into Primary Injected Current Value Connection to a Specific Circuit of Zero Sequence CT Neu o Sensor or CT m CSH120 or CSH200 m Other Zero Sequence CT ACE990 mixiAor5ACT Type of Check Test Performed Result Display Phase Voltage Secondary Injection of VT VT Primary Rated Input Connection Rated Phase to Neutral Phase to Neutral Voltage Vall ii o Voltage V
141. ault is detected the set point output relays are blocked the protection outputs are set to zero Also RTD fault is displayed in the control matrix and an alarm message is generated Block Diagram T lt 4401 F MT10878 Set Point 1 RTD Set Point 2 RTD s Fault Characteristics Ts1 and Ts2 Set Points F C Setting 32 356 F 0 180 C Accuracy 1 2 7 F 1 5 C Resolution 1 F 1 C Pick Up Drop Out Difference 3 C 0 5 Characteristic Times Operation Time lt 5s 1 See Connection of MET1482 Module for accuracy derating according to the wiring cross section Schneider 63230 216 208C1 33 D Electric MT10550 MT10857 Protection Functions Operation The negative sequence unbalance protection function W Picks up if the negative sequence component of phase currents is greater than the operation set point m is time delayed definite time or inverse definite minimum time see curve The negative sequence current is determined according to the 3 phase currents gt 1 gt 22 gt I2 3 x lax Ib xIc 2n E with X If a SepamTM relay is connected to 2 phase current sensors only the negative sequence current is ID css 3 2n with X e g Both formulas are equivalent when there is no zero sequence current ground fault Definite Time Protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA
142. ay of a Sepam relay with an advanced UMI by pressing the key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link m An analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement Range 0 800 Unit Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 1 Refresh Interval 1 s Typical Schneider 63230 216 208C1 19 D Electric Machine Operation Operating Time Before Tripping amp Assistance Functions Delay After Tripping Remaining Operating Time Before Overload Tripping Operation The time is calculated by the thermal protection function and depends on the thermal capacity used Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced user machine interface UMI by pressing the key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link Characteristics Measurement Range 0 999 min Unit min Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 1 min Refresh Interval 1 s Typical Delay After Overload Tripping Operation The time is calculated by the thermal protection function and depends on the thermal capacity used Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced UMI by pressing the amp key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link Characteristics Measurement
143. been assigned The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular applications by customizing the control matrix with the SFT2841 software Control Matrix The control matrix is a simple way to arrange data from m Protection Functions m Predefined Control and Monitoring Functions m Logic Inputs To the following outputs m Output Relays m Nine LEDs on the Front Panel of Sepam Relays m Triggering of Disturbance Recording Operating Principle The processing of each control and monitoring function can be divided into three phases m Acquisition of Input Data o Results of protection function processing o External logic data connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES114 input output module o Remote control command TC received via the communication link m Actual Processing of the Control and Monitoring Function m Utilization of the Processing Results o Activation of output relays to control an actuator n Information sent to the facility manager By message and or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software By remote indication TS via the communication link Control Matrix Logic Outputs Predefined Control and Monitoring Functions Circuit Breaker Contactor Control Signal Lamps A Predefined amp Etc Messages Protection Functions Messages PHASE FAULT Logic Inputs and Outputs The number of Sepam relay logic inputs o
144. c 10 6 2006 12 40 50 PHASE FAULT 1A Tripla 162A Triplb 161A Triple 250A VAN 93 v b 51 b 5iN b gt gt 5IN ext Ooff lon Trip b 51 b gt 5IN lo gt gt SIN ext Ooff lon Tip la 162A nus Ib 161A nus Ic 163A nus 63230 216 208C1 185 Use Key The status key is used to display and enter the Sepam general settings including setting the Sepam date and time They define the protected equipment characteristics and the different optional modules Key The protection key is used to display set and enable or disable the protection units Key The key key is used to m Enter passwords for access to the different modes o Protection setting o Parameter setting m Return to operating mode with no passwords 186 63230 216 208C1 Advanced UMI Blue Keys for Parameter and Protection Setting MT10810 MT10811 MT10808 Schneider D Electric on 51 be51 b gt 5iN b gt 5IN ext Yooff Ylon Trip 50 51 on On O Trip Curve M Threshold 110 A Delay 100 ms Y0 off Ylon Trip on SX Bst e 0 0 0 0 0 0 gt 51 lo gt 5IN b gt 51N ext passwords M Ry eo Co Cancer MEAN 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Use Advanced UMI Blue Keys for Parameter and Protection Setting Key eT on SM b5 151 lb gt 5IN b gt gt 5IN ext Yooff lon Trip The e key is
145. c Times Operation Time Pick Up 35 ms Typically 25 ms Overshoot Time 35 ms Reset Time 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 135 V p with TP 230 V v3 52 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Neutral Voltage Displacement ANSI Code 59N Operation The protection function picks up if the residual voltage Vr is above a Vsr set point gt gt gt gt with Vr Van Vbn Vcn m it includes a definite time delay T m The residual voltage is either calculated from the 3 phase voltages or measured by an external VT Block Diagram Van Vbn X E Vcn T 0 Time Delayed Output External VT Pick Up Signal Characteristics Vs0 Set Point Setting 2 80 V p if VNsr sum of 3Vs 2 80 Vi p if VNsr Vi s V3 5 80 V p if VNsr V s 3 Accuracy 1 2 or 0 005 V p Resolution 1 Drop Out Pick Up Ratio 97 1 Time Delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Characteristic Times Operation Time Pick Up 55 ms Overshoot Time lt 35 ms Reset Time lt 55 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 VNsr is one of the general settings Schneider 63230 216 208C1 53 D Electric Protection Functions Starts per Hour ANSI Code 66 Operation The 3 phase function picks up when the numb
146. ce ANSI Code 46 Determination of tripping time for different negative sequence current t s values for a given curve Use the table to find the value of K that corresponds to the required negative sequence current The tripping 5000 time is equal to KT 0000 MT10546 Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT Tripping Curve 2000 1000 Example given a tripping curve with the setting 500 T 0 5s 200 100 What is the tripping time at 0 6 Ig 50 20 Use the table to find the value of K that corresponds to max curve T 1s 60 of lg The table reads 10 K 7 55 5 RE 2 The tripping time is equal to 0 5 x 7 55 3 755s 1 0 5 0 2 0 1 0 05 min curve T 0 1s 0 02 0 01 0 005 0 002 0 001 Ve 0 05 0 1 02 03 0507 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 I2 IB 10 15 20 25 30 33 33 35 40 45 50 55 57 7 60 65 70 75 K 99 95 54 50 3544 25 38 19 32 16 51 15 34 12 56 10 53 9 00 8 21 7 84 7 55 7 00 6 52 6 11 I2 IB cont d 80 85 90 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 K cont d 5 74 542 548 4 87 464 424 390 3 61 337 3 415 2 96 280 265 252 240 2 29 I2 IB cont d 22 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 K cont d 2 14 2 10 2 01 1 94 1 86 1 80 1 74 1 68 1 627 1 577 1 53 1 485 1 444 1 404 1 367 1 332 I2 IB cont d 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 gt 500 K cont d 1 298 1 267 1 236 1 18 1 167 1 154 1 13 1 105 1 082 1 06 104 1 02 1 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserv
147. celeration External Tripping 3 1 CLS m 4 123 Buchholz Alarm Buchholz Alarm Message Rotor Rotation Detection a Thermistor Tripping 1 nu L Block Ground Fault Protection a End of Charging Position E a nu E 124 Thermostat Alarm 1 Thermostat Alarm Message Thermistor Alarm 1 a E External Tripping 5 and 50BF Activation Li Block Remote Control Excluding TC1 1 nu nu 125 Block remote control Including TC1 1 SF6 1 a a SF6 2 a 126 Change of Thermal Settings a a a Block Thermal Overload a Ci a Block Recloser Logic Outputs Tripping 5 O1 Block Closing L 5 02 Watchdog L a 04 Close Command Ci a a O11 Note All of the logic inputs are available via the communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 control matrix for other applications that aren t predefined 1 These inputs have a parameter setting with the prefix NEG for undervoltage operation 2 Buchholz Gas trip message 3 Thermostat trip message 4 Pressure trip message 70 63230 216 208C1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric Control and Monitoring Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Circuit Breaker Contactor Control Description Sepam relays can be used to control breaking devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping coils m Circuit breakers with normally ope
148. cles in duration and includes user defined pre event cycles The record comprises the following information m Values sampled from the different signals m Date m Characteristics of the recorded channels The files are recorded in FIFO First In First Out type shift storage the oldest record is erased when a new record is triggered Transfer Files can be uploaded to a PC locally or remotely m Locally o By using a PC which is connected to the pocket terminal connector and has the SFT2841 software tool m Remotely O By using a software tool specific to the remote monitoring and control system e g SMS software Recovery The signals are recovered from a record by means of the SFT2826 software tool Principle Stored Record Triggering Event Characteristics Record Duration X Shots before the Triggering Event 1 Total 86 Cycles Set Up File Date Channel Characteristics Measuring Transformer Ratio Sample File 12 Values per Event 4 Current Channels la Ib Ic Ir or 4 Voltage Channels Van Vbn Vcn Vr Logical Signals 10 Digital inputs Outputs O1 Pick Up Number of Stored Records 2 File Format COMTRADE 97 1 According to parameter setting with the SFT2841 default setting 36 shots 2 According to sensor type and connection Record Content Analog Signals Recorded 2 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Machine Operation Assistance Functions 2007 Schneider Elec
149. d Introduction Environmental Characteristics Emission Tests Disturbing Field Emission IEC 60255 25 EN 55022 A Conducted Disturbance Emission IEC 60255 25 EN 55022 B Immunity Tests Radiated Disturbances Immunity to Radiated Felds IEC 60255 22 3 10 V m 80 MHz to 1 GHz IEC 61000 4 3 In 10 V m 80 MHz to 2 GHz ANSI C37 90 2 35 V m 25 MHz to1 GHz Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60255 22 2 8 kV Air 6 kV Contact ANSI C37 90 3 8 kV Air 4 kV Contact Immunity to Magnetic Fields at Network Frequency IEC 61000 4 8 4 30 Continuous to 300 1 3 s A m Immunity Tests Conducted Disturbances Immunity to Conducted RF Disturbances IEC 60255 6 5 10V Fast Transient Bursts IEC 60255 22 4 Aor B 4 kV 2 5 kHz 2 kV 5 kHz IEC 61000 4 4 IV 4 kV 2 5 kHz ANSI C37 90 1 4 kV 2 5 kHz 1 MHz Damped Oscillating Wave IEC 60255 22 1 I 2 5 kV MC 1 kV MD ANSI C37 90 1 2 5 kV MC and MD 100 KHz Damped Oscillating Wave IEC 61000 4 12 2 5 kV MC 1 kV MD Surges IEC 61000 4 5 I 2 kV MC 1 kV MD Voltage Interruptions IEC 60255 11 Series 20 100 10 ms Series 40 100 20 ms Energized Vibrations IEC 60255 21 1 2 1 Gn 10 150 Hz IEC 60068 6 5 Fc 2 13 2 Hz a 0 039 in x1 mm Shocks IEC 60255 21 2 2 10 Gn 11 ms Earthquakes IEC 60255 21 3 2 2 Gn Horizontal Axes 1 Gn Vertical Axes De Energized Vibrations IEC 60255 21 1 2 2 Gn 10 150 Hz Shocks IEC 60255 21 2 2 30 Gn 11 ms Bu
150. dditional cabling At the time of commissioning the user sets the synchronization mode parameter 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Time Tagging of Events Initialization of the Time Tagging Function Each time the communication system is initialized Sepam is energized events are generated in the following command m Appearance of data loss m Appearance of incorrect time W Appearance of not synchronous m Disappearance of data loss The function is initialized with the current values of the remote annunciation and logic input status After the initialization phase event detection is activated It can only be interrupted by saturation of the internal event storage queue or by the presence of a major fault in Sepam Date and Time An absolute date and time are generated internally by Sepam in the following standard format IEC870 5 4 Year Month Day Hour minute millisecond The internal clock is not saved and must be set via the communication network each time the Sepam relay is energized This can be accomplished two ways m By the remote monitoring and control system via the Modbus link m Via the SFT2841 software on the General Characteristics screen The time that is tagged on events is encoded in 8 bytes as follows b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b09 b08 b07 b06 b05 b04 b03 b02 b01 b00 Word 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Wordi 0 0 0 0 M M M M 0 0 0 D D D D D Word2 0 0 0 H H H H H 0 O0 mn
151. de Sepam Parameter and Protection Setting The parameter and protection setting of a Sepam using SFT2841 consists of preparing the Sepam file containing all the characteristics that are specific to the application a file that is then downloaded into the Sepam relay at the time of commissioning A CAUTION HAZARD OF UNINTENDED OPERATION m The device must only be configured and set by qualified personnel using the results of the installation protection system study m During commissioning of the installation and after any modification check that the Sepam configuration and protection function settings are consistent with the results of this study Failure to follow these instructions can cause equipment damage Operating mode 1 Create a Sepam file for the type of Sepam to be set up The newly created file contains the Sepam factory set parameter and protection settings 2 Modify the Sepam page function sheet parameters and the Protections page function sheet protection settings m All the information relating to a function is grouped together on a single screen m We recommend entering all the parameter and protection settings in the natural screen order suggested by the guided navigation tool Entry of parameter and protection settings m The parameter and protection setting input fields correspond to the type of value Oselection buttons onumerical value input fields adialog box Combo box m The mod
152. display of a Sepam relay with an advanced UMI by pressing the key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link 1 Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information 2 Optional MES114 or MES114E or MES114F modules Characteristics Measurement Range 1 20 Unit S Accuracy 0 5 s Display Format 3 Significant Digits Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric Protection Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents Setting Ranges Phase to Phase Undervoltage ANSI Code 27P Positive Sequence Undervoltage amp Phase Rotation Direction Check ANSI Code 27D 47 Remanent Undervoltage ANSI Code 27R Phase to Neutral Undervoltage ANSI Code 27N Phase Undercurrent ANSI Code 37 Temperature Monitoring ANSI Code 38 49T Negative Sequence Current Unbalance ANSI Code 46 Excessive Starting Time Locked Rotor ANSI Code 48 51LR 14 Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49RMS Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 50 51 Breaker Failure ANSI Code 50BF Ground Fault ANSI Code 50N 51N or 50G 51G Phase to Phase Overvoltage ANSI Code 59P Neutral Voltage Displacement ANSI Code 59N Starts per Hour ANSI Code 66 Recloser ANSI Code 79 Overfrequency ANSI Code 81H or 810 Underfrequency ANSI Code 81L or 81U Rate of Change of Frequency ANSI Code 81R General Tripping Curves Schneider 63230 216 208C1 D Electric
153. e activated by the watchdog function Schneider 63230 216 208C1 127 D Electric Installation 128 63230 216 208C1 Base Unit Connection of Current Inputs DE51144 To Communication Network Interface n 14 To Optional L Modules Types S20 S23 T20 T23 M20 Connection to 1 A 5 A current sensors Connector Type Ref Cable A Screw Type CCA620 1 wire 0 0003 0 0039 in 0 2 2 5 mm AWG 24 12 2 wires 0 0003 0 0016 in 0 2 1 mm AWG 24 18 Ring Lug 0 25 in CCA622 6 35 mm B Ring Lug 0 16 in CCA630 0 0023 0 0093 in 1 5 6 mm 4 mm CCA634 AWG 16 10 C RJ45 CCA612 D RJ45 CCA770 L 2 ft 0 6 m CCA772 L 6 6 ft 2 m CCA774 L 13 ft 4 m Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE80144 DE80145 DE51826 Installation Base Unit Other Phase Current Input Connection Schemes CCA630 CCA634 CCA630 CCA634 Description Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current Parameters Sensor Type 5ACTOor1ACT Number of CT la Ib Ic Rated Current IN 1A106250A Description Connection of 2 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector The measurement of phase currents 1 and 3 is sufficient to ensure all the phase current based protection functio
154. e passes through point k Ik tk is T tk k Example m Type of time delay standard inverse time SIT m Set point Is m A point k on the operation curve k 3 5 Is 4 s Question What is the time delay T setting operation time at 10 Is Read the table SIT column Line l Is 3 5 therefore K 1 858 Answer The time delay setting is T 2 4 1 858 2 2 15 s Schneider 63230 216 208C1 63 D Electric Protection Functions General Tripping Curves Problem 3 Another Practical Method Given the Is current and time delay T settings foratype the table below gives the values of K ts Ts10 as a function of IIs of time delay standard inverse very inverse extremely inverse find the operation time for a current value IA In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay read the value K tsA Ts10 on the line for IA Is the operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and T settings On the standard curve of the same type read the istAz K T operation time tsA that corresponds to the relative Example current IA Is and the operation time Ts10 that m Type of time delay very inverse time VIT corresponds to the relative current I Is 10 m Set point Is The operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and y Time delay T 0 8 s T settings is tA tsA x T Ts10 th Question What is the operation time for the current IA 6 Is i Read the table VIT column line l Is 6 therefore k 1 8 Answe
155. e to the base unit with a CCA612 cord Grounding terminal _ Link activity LED flashes when communication is active sending or receiving in progress 1 70 mm 2 8 in with CCA612 Cord Connected 2 Jumper for RS485 network line end impedance matching with load resistor ACE949 2 Rc 150 Q to be set to 2 wire Power supply m n if the module is not at one end of the network default position 3 en 5 VDC m Rc if the module is at one end of the network e B B A A V V Network cable clamps inner diameter of clamp 0 24 in or 6 mm Connection m Connection of network cable to screw type terminal blocks A and m Connection of the grounding terminal by a Tinned copper braid with cross section gt 0 0093 in 6 mm AWG 10 a Cable with cross section gt 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 Length lt 7 9 in 200 mm fitted with a 0 16 in 4 mm ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm or 19 5 Ib in m The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable BORNE Ces o The network cable must be stripped 2 wire Power supply o The cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp RS485 120r amp m The interface is to be connected to connector on the base unit using a network 24V DC 9 8 ft 3 m CCA612 cord green fittings m The interfaces are to be supplied w
156. eading this entire set of instructions m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury m LPCT sensor equipped with a shielded cable fitted with a yellow RJ 45 plug is plugged directly into the CCA670 CCA671 connector m Sepam protection unit m CCA670 CCA671 connector LPCT voltage interface with microswitch setting of rated current o CCA670 lateral plugs for Sepam Series 20 and Sepam Series 40 o CCA671 radial plugs for Sepam Series 80 m CCA613 remote test plug flush mounted on the front of the cubicle and equipped with a 3 meter 9 8 ft cord to be plugged into the test plug of the CCA670 CCA671 interface connector 9 pin sub D m ACE917 injection adapter to test the LPCT protection chain with a standard injection box m Standard injection box Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE80065 DE50564 Installation Phase LPCT Output Input 4 CCA613 CCA670 Sepam ACE917 Adapter Injection box 1Aor5A Accessory Connection Principle A CAUTION jagged edges serious injury HAZARD OF CUTS Trim
157. eceiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors The fiber optics are screw locked to Rx and Tx connectors 63230 216 208C1 165 D Electric PE50035 Installation ACE9092 RS232 RS485 Converter A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all Sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional ground m Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 166 63230 216 208C1 ACE9092 RS232 RS485 Converter Function The ACE9092 converter is used to connect a master central computer equipped with a V24 RS232 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2 wire RS485 network Without requiring any flow control signals after the parameters are set the ACE9092 converter performs conversion network polarization and automatic dispatching of frames between the master and the stations by two way simplex ha
158. ected to the communication network are identified by their Modbus address These addresses can be configured in either of the following ways m Manually one by one o Add button is used to define a new Sepam device It is allocated a default Modbus address o Edit button is used to modify the Modbus address if necessary o Delete button removes a device from the configuration m Automatically by running an automatic search of the Sepam units connected o Automatic search Stop search button starts or interrupts the search o When SFT2841 recognizes a Sepam unit its Modbus address and type are shown on screen n When a Modbus device other than Sepam responds to SFT2841 its Modbus address is displayed The text indicates that the device is not a Sepam The Sepam network configuration is saved in a file when the UMI window closes by pressing the OK button Access to Sepam Information To establish communication between SFT2841 and a Sepam network select the Sepam network configuration you want and press Connect The Sepam network is displayed in the connection window SFT2841 polls all the equipment defined in the selected configuration Each Sepam queried is represented by an icon E Ed Sepam Series 20 or Sepam Series 40 connected to the network E Sepam Series 80 connected to the network L I Sepam configured but not connected to the network L a Device other than Sepam connected to the network A summar
159. ed Scbneider 63230 216 208C1 35 D Electric Protection Functions DE50558 Excessive Starting Time Locked Rotor DES NN Rotor Rotation Case of normal starting DE50559 Locked Rotor Rotor Rotation Case of excessive starting time I Starting Time Finished Is 0 11B Excessive Starting Time Locked Rotor Output Rotor Rotation Case of locked rotor output DE50561 Locked Rotor i Output i Rotor Rotation Tachometer input 123 required to detect zero speed See locked rotor on start description above Case of starting locked rotor 36 63230 216 208C1 MT10870 Schneider D Electric Excessive Starting Time Locked Rotor ANSI Code 48 51LR Operation This function is three phase and is comprised of two parts W Excessive starting time o During starting The protection picks up when one of the 3 phase currents is greater than the Is set point for a longer period of time than the ST time delay normal starting time m Locked rotor Hu At the normal operating rate after starting The protection picks up when one of the 3 phase currents is greater than the Is set point for a longer period of time than the LT definite time delay commonly known as JAM protection o Locked on start Large motors may take a very long time to start longer than the permissive rotor blocking time because of their inertia or a reduced voltage supply To protect such a
160. eider Electric USA Electrical equipment should be installed operated serviced and maintained only by qualified 295 Tech Park Drive Suite 100 personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising LaVergne TN 37086 out of the use of this material Tel 1 888 SquareD 1 888 778 2733 www us squared com 63230 216 208C1 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
161. en a zero sequence CT with a ratio of 1 400 2 VA used within a measurement range of 0 5 60 A How should it be connected to Sepam via the ACE990 1 Choose a close approximation of the rated current INr Le 5 A 2 Calculate the ratio approx INr number of turns 5 400 0 0125 3 Find the closest value of k in the table opposite to k 0 01136 4 Check the mininum power required for the zero sequence CT 2 VA zero sequence CT 0 1 VA V OK 5 Connect the zero sequence CT secondary to ACE990 input terminals E2 and E4 6 Set Sepam up with INr 0 01136 x 400 2 4 5 A This value of INr can be used to monitor current between 0 45 A and 67 5 A Wiring of MV zero sequence CT secondary circuit m MV zero sequence CT S1 output to ACE990 E2 input terminal m MV zero sequence CT S2 output to ACE990 E4 input terminal 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider D Electric ACE990 Zero Sequence CT Interface Connection Connection of Zero Sequence CT Only one zero sequence CT can be connected to the ACE990 interface The secondary circuit of the MV zero sequence CT is connected to 2 of the 5 ACE990 interface input terminals To define the 2 input terminals it is necessary to know the following m Zero sequence CT ratio 1 n m Zero sequence CT power m Close approximation of rated current INr a INr is a general setting in Sepam and defines the ground fault protection setting range between 0 1 INr and 15 I
162. epam S20 S23 T20 T23 or M20 when phase currents are measured by 1 A or 5 A current transformers Procedure 1 To inject a current into the phase 1 input connect the single phase generator to the test terminal box using the plug provided in accordance with the diagram below DE80135 Sepam S20 S23 T20 T23 M20 Terminal Test Box Current Generator Turn on the generator Inject the CT secondary rated current i e 1 A or 5 A Use the SFT2841 software to check that the phase 1 current value is approximately equal to the CT primary rated current 5 Ifthe residual current is calculated by taking the sum of the 3 phase currents use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual current value is approximately equal to the CT primary rated current 6 Ifthe residual current is measured via 3 phase CTs use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual current value is approximately equal to the CT primary rated current Turn off the generator Proceed in the same way for the other 2 phase current inputs At the end of the test put the cover back on the test terminal box AUN 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 195 lectric Commissioning Description Check to be performed for Sepam S20 S23 T20 T23 or M20 when phase currents are measured by LPCT type current sensors Phase Current Measurement by LPCT sensors m The 3 LPCT current sensors
163. er 2 relay group 3 Performs Sepam B20 functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Scbneider 63230 216 208C1 5 D Electric Introduction Technical Characteristics Minimum Weight Sepam with Basic UMI and without MES114 2 6 Ib 1 2 kg Maximum Weight Sepam with Advanced UMI and MES114 8 7 lb 1 7 kg Current Transformer Input Impedance lt 0 02 Q 1A or 5 ACT with CCA630 or CCA634 Burden lt 0 02 VAat1A 1 A to 6250 A Ratings lt 0 5VAat5 A Rated Thermal Withstand 4 IN 1 Second Overload 100 IN Voltage Transformer Input Impedance gt 100 KQ 220 V to 250 kV Ratings Input Voltage 100 to 230 V3 V Rated Thermal Withstand 240V 1 Second Overload 480 V Type of Sensor Pt 100 Ni 100 120 Isolation from Ground None None Current Injected in Sensor 4mA 4mA Maximum Distance between Sensor and Module 1 km 0 62 mi Voltage 24 250 V DC 110 125 V DC 110 V AC 220 250 VDC 220 240 V AC Range 19 2 275 V DC 88 150 V DC 88 132 V AC 176 275 V DC 176 264 V AC Frequency 47 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Typical Burden 3 mA 3mA 3mA 3 mA 3 mA Typical Switching Threshold 14 V DC 82 V DC 58 V AC 154 V DC 120 V AC Input Limit Voltage At State 1 219V DC 2 88 V DC 2 88 V AC z 176 V DC z 176 V AC At State 0 lt 6VDC lt 75 V DC lt 22 V AC lt 137 V DC lt 48 V AC Isolation of inputs in relation to Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced other isolated groups Control
164. er is definitively open after the reclosing shots Impulse type output Logic Inputs 111 to 114 and 121 to 126 According to configuration If MES114 module is configured BI Transmission Sending of the blocking information to the following Sepam relay in zone selective interlocking chain OS by default TCS Trip circuit fault or mismatching of CB position contacts If the circuit breaker contactor control function is activated CB Control Fault A circuit breaker open or close command has not been executed Sensor Fault Hardware problem on an MET module or on an RTD Pick Up Logical OR of the instantaneous output of all protection units Watchdog Monitoring of Sepam operation Always on O4 if used 84 63230 216 208C1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Modbus Communication 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents Presentation Modbus Protocol Configuring the Communication Interfaces Commissioning and Diagnosis Data Addresses and Encoding Time Tagging of Events Access to Remote Settings Disturbance Recording Schneider 63230 216 208C1 D Electric 86 87 88 90 92 101 106 115 117 85 Modbus Communication 86 63230 216 208C1 Presentation General Sepam relays are connected to a Modbus communication network via a communication interface This allows Sepam relays to be connected to a supervisor or any othe
165. er of starts reaches the following limits m Maximum number of starts allowed per period P of time Nt m Maximum allowed number of consecutive hot starts Nh m Maximum allowed number of consecutive cold starts Nc The function indicates m The number of starts dependent on the motor s thermal state still allowed before the maximum if the protection has not activated m Waiting time before a start is allowed if the protection has activated Note Starting is detected when the current consumed becomes greater than 10 of the Ig current User Information The following information is available see Machine Operation Assistance Functions on page 19 for more information m The waiting time before a start is allowed m The number of starts still allowed The number of consecutive starts is the number starts counted during the last P Nt minutes with Nt being the number of starts allowed per period The motor hot state corresponds to the exceeded fixed set point 50 heat rise of the thermal overload function When the motor re accelerates it undergoes a stress similar to that of starting without the current first passing through a value less than 10 of Ip in which case the number of starts is not incremented It is possible however to increment the number of starts when re acceleration occurs by logic data input input 122 Block Diagram MT10871 Block Closing Input 122 P min Nt Thermal Alarm Hot
166. etect transmission errors 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 87 ectric PE50584 Modbus Communication SFT 2841 Sepam serie 20 M20 General setting Type of agchcaon Sepam Tyee Sapam modei O Uk model into tend advanced UN UO model ft nd advanced UM Opn modes T7 MES trout oupa mente e e 17 MET V humane sansar model T7 MSA MI T analog dp model SFT2841 Sepam Configuration Screen Communication configuration SFT2841 Communication Configuration Window for ACE949 63230 216 208C1 Configuring the Communication Interfaces Access to Configuration Parameters The Sepam communication interfaces are configured using the SFT2841 software The configuration parameters can be accessed from the Communication configuration window in SFT2841 To access this window m Open the Sepam configuration window in SFT2841 m Check the box for ACE9xx communication interface m Click nm the Communication configuration window appears m Select the type of interface used ACE949 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO m Select the Modbus communication protocol The configuration parameters will vary depending on the communication interface selected ACE949 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO The table below specifies the parameters to be configured depending on the communication interface chosen Parameters to Be Configured ACE949 ACE969TP ACE969FO ACE959 AC
167. ettings These values define the settings of the sensors connected to PowerLogic Sepam relays and determine the performance of the metering and protection functions used They are accessed via the General Characteristics tab in the SFT2841 setting software IN Rated Phase Current 20r3CT1A 5A 1 6250 A Sensor Primary Current 3 LPCTs 25 3150 AM lg Base Current According to Equipment Power Rating 0 4 1 3 IN INr Rated Residual Current 2 Sum of 3 Phase Currents See IN rated phase current CSH120 or CSH200 Zero Sequence CT 2 20 A rating 1A 5ACT 1 6250 A Zero Zequence CT ACE990 According to Current Monitored the Zero Sequence CT Ratio and Use of ACE990 1 n must be such that 50 lt n lt 1500 Vup Rated Primary Phase to Phase Voltage 220 V to 250 kV Vnp Rated Primary Phase to Neutral Voltage VinP Vup3 Vus Rated Secondary Phase to Phase Voltage 3 VTs Van Vbn Vcn 100 110 115 120 200 240 V 2 VTs Vab Vbc 100 110 115 120 V 1 VT Van 100 110 115 120 V Vsr Secondary Zero Sequence Voltage for V s 3 or Vi s V3 Primary Zero Sequence Voltage V p V3 Rated Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz Integration Period For Demand Current and Peak Demand Current and Power 5 10 15 30 60 min 1 IN values for LPCT in Amps 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 1 INr should be thought of as a relay input port for ground fault protection Thi
168. f not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Schneider 63230 216 208C1 D Electric 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Contents Introduction Metering Functions Protection Functions Control and Monitoring Functions Modbus Communication Installation Use 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 ectric 63230 216 208C1 Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Introduction 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents Overview of PowerLogic Sepam Protective Relays Overview of Sepam Series 20 Protective Relays Selection Table Technical Characteristics Environmental Characteristics Schneider 63230 216 208C1 D Electric o c0 fF NM Introduction Overview of PowerLogic Sepam Protective Relays The PowerLogic Sepam range of protective relays is designed for protection applications on medium voltage public and Sepam Series 20 industrial distribution networks For Simple Applications The Sepam product range consists of three series of relays m Sepam Serie
169. ff T2 n T1 25 min o T2 70min m Maximum curve in steady state Imax lg 1 05 Setting of Tripping Set Point Es2 Es2 Imax lg 110 Note If the motor absorbs a current of 1 05 lg in steady state the heat rise calculated by the thermal overload protection will reach 11096 For unknown operating conditions assume Imax SFx FLA Setting of Alarm Set Point Es1 Es1 90 l lg 0 95 Knegative 4 5 usual value The other thermal overload parameters not accounted for by default do not need to be set Example 2 In this example the following data are available m Motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold curves see the solid line curves Figure 1 m Cooling time constant T2 m Maximum steady state current Imax lg 1 05 Setting of Tripping Set Point Es2 Es2 Imax lg 110 Setting of Alarm Set Point Es1 Es1 90 I lg 0 95 The manufacturer s hot cold curves may be used to determine the heating time constant T1 The approach consists of placing the Sepam relay hot cold curves below the motor curves Figure 1 Motor Thermal Resistance and Thermal Overload Tripping Curves Motor Cold Curve 4 Sepam Relay N Cold Curve D ir amp 665 Motor Hot Curve 2 E 70 Sepam Relay 9 Hot Curve o m o 105 2 18 For an overload of 2 lg the value t T1 0 0339 is obtained In order for the Sepam relay to trip at the point 1 t 70 s T1 is e
170. firmed Instantaneous m Inst lt 50 ms at 2 Is for Is 2 0 3 IN Typically 35 ms m Inst lt 70 ms at 2 Is for Is lt 0 3 IN Typically 50 ms Overshoot Time 35 ms Reset Time lt 50 ms for T1 0 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting Ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting Mode Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 4 20 Very Inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 8 33 Very Inverse LTI and IEC LTWB 0 01 0 93 Ext Inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 15 47 IEEE Moderately Inverse 0 42 51 86 IEEE Very Inverse 0 73 90 57 IEEE Extremely Inverse 1 24 154 32 IAC Inverse 0 34 42 08 IAC Very Inverse 0 61 75 75 IAC Extremely Inverse 1 08 134 4 3 Only for Standardized Tripping Curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 47 lectric Protection Functions Breaker Failure ANSI Code 50BF Operation This function is designed to detect when a breaker fails i e it fails to open when a trip command is sent The breaker failure function is activated m By a trip command issued by the overcurrent protection functions 50 51 50N 51N 46 m By an external trip command sent by logic input 124 124 should be assigned to external trip function 5 It checks that the current has disappeared within the time interval specified by the time delay T It can also take into account the position of the breaker read on the logic inputs to determine effect
171. for impedance matching with load resistor Rc to be set to m i6 if the module is not the last interlinked module default position m Rc if the module is the last interlinked module 2 Jumper used to select module number to be set to m MET1 1st MET1482 module to measure temperatures T1 to T8 default position m MET2 2nd MET1482 module to measure temperatures T9 to T16 for Sepam Series 40 and Series 80 only Schneider 63230 216 208C1 151 D Electric DE51649 Installation MET 148 2 ON VTA N 1 2 ns Ly Ff EN SA N 2 s s N 6 T 7 Nea AN 8 3 ANT L f L 10 10 neg S 11 AVANT 12 12 Ag FS 152 MET1482 Temperature Sensor Module Connection A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Check that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Connection of the Grounding Terminal By tinned copper braid with cross section gt 0 0093 in 6 mm AWG 10 or cable with cross section 7 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 and length x 7 9 in 2
172. g Should the Sepam fall out of a cubicle check its condition by visual inspection and energizing Storage Keep the cubicle protection packing for as long as possible Sepam like all electronic units should not be stored in a damp environment for more than a month Sepam should be energized as quickly as possible If this is not possible the cubicle heating System should be activated Environment of the Installed Sepam Operation in a Damp Environment The temperature relative humidity factors must be compatible with the unit s environmental withstand characteristics If the use conditions are outside the normal zone special arrangements should be made before commissioning such as air conditioning of the premises Operation in a Polluted Atmosphere A contaminated industrial atmosphere such as the presence of chlorine hydrofluoric acid sulfur solvents etc can cause corrosion of the electronic components in which case environmental control arrangements should be made such as pressurized premises with filtered air etc before commissioning The effect of corrosion on Sepam has been tested according to the IEC 60068 2 60 standard Sepam is certified level C under the following test conditions m 2 Gas test 21 days 25 C 77 F 75 relative humidity 0 5 ppm H S 1 ppm SO m 4 Gas test 21 days 25 C 77 F 75 relative humidity 0 01 ppm H5S 0 2 ppm SO 0 2 ppm NO 0 01 ppm Cl Schneider 63230 216 208C1 121
173. g m Use of digital technology ensures the reproducibility of the stated performances m Each of the Sepam functions has undergone full factory qualification m An internal self testing system provides continuous information on the state of the electronic components and the integrity of the functions e g automatic tests diagnose the level of component polarization voltages the continuity of the analog value acquisition chain non alteration of RAM memory absence of settings outside the tolerance range and thereby ensures a high level of availability Therefore Sepam relays are ready to operate without any additional qualification testing that directly concerns them Sepam Commissioning Tests The preliminary Sepam commissioning tests can be limited to a commissioning check i e m Checking compliance with BOMs and hardware installation diagrams and rules during a preliminary general check m Checking compliance of the general settings and protection settings entered with the setting sheets m Checking current or voltage input connections by secondary injection tests m Checking logic input and output connections by simulation of input data and forcing of output status m Validating the complete protection chain m Checking the connection of the optional MET1482 and MSA141 modules The various checks are described further on General Principles m All the tests should be carried out with the MV cubicle completely isolated and the MV circ
174. han 40 of VN m The frequency is outside the measurement range Readout The measurement can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced user machine interface UMI by pressing the amp 3 key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link m An analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Rated Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz Range 50Hz 45 55 Hz 60 Hz 55 65 Hz Accuracy 1 0 05 Hz Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 0 01 Hz or 1 Digit Refresh Interval 1 s Typical 1 At Vj p in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Temperature Operation This function gives the temperature value measured by resistance temperature detectors RTDs m Platinum Pt100 100 Q at 32 F or 0 C in accordance with the IEC 60751 and DIN 43760 standards m Nickel 100 Q or 120 Q at 32 F or 0 C Each RTD channel gives one measurement m tx RTD x temperature The function also indicates RTD faults m RTD disconnected tx gt 401 F or 205 C m RTD shorted tx 31 F or 35 C Note In the event of a fault display of the value is blocked and the associated monitoring function generates a maintenance alarm Readout The measurement can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced UMI by pressing the key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link m An analog converte
175. he SFT2841 Sepam Diagnosis screen 63230 216 208C1 91 D Electric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Presentation Data which are similar from the monitoring and control application viewpoint are grouped together in adjacent address zones Synchronization Zone 0002 0005 3 16 Identification Zone 0006 000F 3 First Event Table Exchange Word 0040 0040 3 6 16 Events 1 to 4 0041 0060 3 Second Event Table Exchange Word 0070 0070 3 6 16 Events 1 to 4 0071 0090 3 Data States 0100 0105 3 4 1 2 Measurements 0106 0131 3 4 Remote Control Commands 01F0 01FO 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 15 Remote Control Confirmation 01F1 01F1 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 15 Test Zone 0C00 OCOF 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 15 Protection Settings Reading 2000 207C 3 Reading Request 2080 2080 3 6 16 Remote Settings 2100 217C 3 6 Disturbance Recording Choice of Transfer Function 2200 2203 3 16 Identification Zone 2204 2228 3 Fault Rec Exchange Word 2300 2300 3 6 16 Fault Rec Data 2301 237C 3 Application Configuration FCOO FCO2 3 Application Identification FC10 FC22 3 Note Non addressable zones may reply by an exception message or supply non significant data Note These zones may be accessed in word mode or in bit mode Note The address of bit i 0 lt i F of address word J is then J x 16 i e g 0C00 bit O C000 0C00 bit 7 C007 92 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric Al
176. he frequency is below the set point and the Vab voltage is more than 20 of V p It also includes a definite time delay T Block diagram T 0 ime F Fs Time Delayed Output Pick Up Signal 1 V1 gt 0 2Vinp 1 Or Vab gt 0 2 V p if only one VT If there is only one sensor Vab the voltage signal is connected to terminals 1 and 2 of the connector CCT640 irrespective of phase Characteristics Fs Set Point Setting 45 50 Hz or 55 60 Hz Resolution 0 1Hz Accuracy 1 0 1 Hz Pick Up Drop Out Difference 0 2 Hz x0 1 Hz Time Delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Characteristic Times 1 Operation Time Pick Up 100 ms Typically 80 ms Overshoot Time 100 ms Reset Time 100 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 and df dt lt 3 Hz s 58 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Rate of Change of Frequency ANSI Code 81H Operation This function picks up when the rate of change of frequency df dt of the positive sequence voltage overshoots the set point If only one VT is connected Vab the function is blocked This function includes a definite time delay T Block Diagram E Fmax EST Time Fmin dF
177. hielding Connection to Sepam Series 80 m To residual current Ir input on connector B terminals 15 and 14 shielding m To residual current l r input on connector B terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended Cable 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved m Sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid m Minimum cable cross section 0 0014 in 0 93 mm AWG 18 m Resistance per unit length lt 100 mQ m 30 5 mQ ft m Minimum dielectric strength 1000 V 700 Vrms m Connect the cable shielding in the shortest manner possible to the Sepam relay m Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in the Sepam relay do not ground by any other means The maximum resistance of the Sepam connection wiring must not exceed 4 i e 66 ft maximum for 30 5 mQ ft or 20 m maximum for 100 mQ m Schneider D Electric 63230 216 208C1 141 Installation CSH30 Interposing Ring CT Function The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used as an interface when the residual current or zero sequence is measured using 1 A or 5 A current transformers E44717 Characteristics Weight 0 265 Ib 0 12 kg Vertical Assembly of CSH30 Horizontal Assembly of Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Interposing Ring CT CSH30 Interposing Ring CT in vertical or horizontal position Dimensions in mm DE80023 142 63230 216 208C1 Schneider
178. ication is IP based use of SFT2841 is restricted to a local installation network based on an Ethernet Local Area Network LAN The operation of SFT2841 over a Wide Area Network WAN cannot be guaranteed because of the presence of some routers or firewalls that may reject the Modbus protocol causing communication times that would be incompatible with Sepam relays Note 2 SFT2841 allows Sepam protection settings to be modified and direct activation of the outputs These operations which could involve the operation of electrical equipment opening and closing and thus put the safety of people and installations at risk are protected by the Sepam password In addition to this protection the E LANs and S LANs must be designed as private networks protected from external actions by all suitable methods 178 63230 216 208C1 S RES 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric PE50590 Use ComSepm RT Type of lason C Serial Phone modem C TCR Configuration Window for the Communication network via Telephone Modem 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider SFT2841 Setting and Operating Software Configuration of a Sepam Network Link Via Telephone Modem The Sepam units are connected to an RS485 multidrop network using an industrial STN modem the called modem Configure it with AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the
179. ide it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional ground m Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 146 63230 216 208C1 Voltage Transformers The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the CCT640 connector item B on B2X type Sepam units CCT640 Connector The connector contains 4 transformers which provide impedance matching and isolation between the VTs and Sepam input circuits Terminals B1 to B6 are intended for phase voltage measurement and B7 and B8 for residual voltage measurement case shown not connected if obtained by the sum of the 3 phase voltages DE50565 1 1 2 or 8 VTs case shown Installation of the CCT640 Connector 1 Insert the connector pins into the slots 1 on the base unit 2 Flatten the connector against the unit to plug it into the 9 pin SUB D connector principle similar to that of the MES module 3 Tighten the mounting screw 2 Connection m The connections are made to the screw type connectors that can be accessed on the rear of the CCT640 item 9 m Wiring with no fittings o 1 wire with maximum cross section of 0 00
180. ider Electric All Rights Reserved Modbus Communication 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Access to Remote Settings Protection Settings They are organized according to increasing ANSI codes ANSI 27 Phase to Phase Undervoltage Function Number 10xx 63230 216 208C1 D Electric Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or Disabled D 2 Vs Set Point Vp 3 Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 4 8 Reserved ANSI 27D 47 Positive Sequence Undervoltage Function Number 08xx Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or Disabled 2 Vs1 Set Point Vp 3 Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 4 8 Reserved ANSI 27R Remanent Undervoltage Function Number 0901 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or Disabled D 2 Vs Set Point V p 3 Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 4 8 Reserved ANSI 27S Phase to Neutral Undervoltage Function Number 1801 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or Disabled D 2 Vs Set Point VinP 3 Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 4 8 Reserved ANSI 37 Phase Undercurrent Function Number 0501 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or Disabled 2 Is Set Point IB 3 Tripping Time Delay 10 ms ANSI 38 49T Temperature Monitoring Function number 15xx Relay 1 xx 2 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Relay 3 xx 03 Relay 4 xx 04 Relay 5 xx 05 Relay 6 xx 06 Relay 7 xx 2 07
181. ifications made to a function sheet are to be Applied or Canceled before the user goes on to the following function sheet m The consistency of the parameter and protection Settings entered is checked DA clear message specifies the inconsistent value in the function sheet opened o Values which become inconsistent following the modification of a parameter are replaced by and must be corrected 176 63230 216 208C1 ARR RIT Schneider D Electric SFT2841 Setting and Operating Software Use of the Software Connected to Sepam Mode Static Electric Discharge When a laptop is used given the risks inherent in the accumulation of static electricity the customary precaution consists of discharging while in contact with a grounded metal frame before physically connecting the CCA783 cord Plugging into Sepam m Plug the 9 pin connector SUB D type into one of the PC communication ports o Configure the PC communication port via the Communication port function in the Options menu m Plug the 6 pin connector round minidin type into the connector situated behind the blanking plate on the front panel of Sepam or the DSM303 module Connection to Sepam 2 possibilities for setting up the connection between SFT2841 and the Sepam m Choice of Connect to the Sepam at the start up of SFT2841 m Connection function in the File menu Once the connection with Sepam has been established Connected appears in the status bar a
182. instruction can cause serious injury A 8 50 0 39 0 59 216 10 15 9 29 236 AMT840 Mounting Plate 124 63230 216 208C1 Schneider Base Unit Dimensions Dimensions in y mm DE80114 DE80042 Sepam Relay with Advanced UMI and MES114 Flush Mounted in Front Panel 1 57 40 1 22 lt B a 3 80 98 1 With Basic UMI 0 91 in 23 mm Sepam Relay with Advanced UMI and MES114 Flush Mounted in Front Panel Clearance for Sepam Assembly and Wiring Cut Out Cut out accuracy must be complied with to ensure good withstand For mounting plate 3 17 mm 0 125 inch thick For mounting plate between 1 5 mm 0 059 in and 3 mm 0 12 in thick in in mm mm DE80028 DE80044 6 38 0 2 6 38 0 2 162 0 2 162 0 2 Assembly with AMT840 Mounting Plate Used to mount the Sepam relay with basic UMI at the back of the compartment with access to the connectors on the rear panel Mounting associated with the use of the remote advanced UMI DSM303 0 08 2 DE80082 Sepam Relay with Basic UMI and MES114 Mounted with AMT840 Plate Mounting Plate Thickness 0 079 in 2 mm 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Installation Base Unit Assembly yN DANGER The Sepam relay is sim
183. ion of the ACE Interface Use the following to establish that an ACE interface is operating correctly m The indicator LEDs on the front panel of the ACE m The information provided by the SFT2841 software connected to Sepam o On the Diagnosis screen Hn On the Communication Configuration screens Link Activity LED for ACE9492 ACE959 and ACE937 The link activity LED for ACE9492 ACE959 and ACE937 interfaces flashes when Sepam transmission or reception is active Indicator LEDs on the ACE969 m Green on LED ACE969 energized m Red key LED indicates ACE969 interface status o LED off ACE969 configured and communication operational o LED flashing ACE969 configuration error or ACE969 not configured o LED on ACE969 error m Link activity LED S LAN Tx flashing Sepam transmission active m Link activity LED S LAN Rx flashing Sepam reception active Diagnosis Using SFT2841 Software Sepam Diagnosis Screen When connected to Sepam the SFT2841 software informs the operator of the general Sepam status and of the Sepam communication status in particular All Sepam relay status information appears on the Sepam diagnosis screen Sepam Communication Diagnosis The following information provided by the SFT2841 software can assist in identifying and resolving communication problems m Name of the protocol configured m Modbus interface version number m Number of valid frames received CPT9 m Number of invalid frames received CPT2 90 6
184. ip unit 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Reset Circuit Breaker Contactor Control Latching Acknowledgment The tripping outputs of the protection functions and logic inputs can be latched individually logic outputs cannot be latched The logic outputs set up in pulse mode maintain pulse type operation even when linked to latched data Note Latched data are saved in the event of a power failure All latched data can be acknowledged locally on the UMI or remotely by a logic input orthe communication link The Latching Acknowledgment function associated with the Circuit Breaker Contactor Control function may be used to perform the ANSI 86 Lockout Relay function TC Circuit Breaker Position Discrepancy This function detects a discrepancy between the last remote control command received and the actual position of the circuit breaker Remote Contr Position Discrepancy Note The information is accessible via remote indication TS42 Trip Circuit Supervision and Open Closed Matching Description This supervision is designed for trip circuits m With normally open trip circuits the function detects o Circuit continuity D Loss of supply O Mismatching of position contacts Note The function blocks closing of the breaking device m With undervoltage trip units The function detects mismatched position contacts with coil supervision unnecessary in this case The information is accessible in the matri
185. ipping curves except for customized and RI curves may be set as follows m Time T operating time at 10 x Is m TMS factor factor shown as T p in the equations on the left 13 5 x TMS where TMS T i 15 I S ts IEC Curve VIT DE51629 TMS Example t I Note The IEC curve of the VIT type is positioned so as to be the same with TMS 1orT 1 5s 10 Ws Example Timer Hold The adjustable timer hold T1 is gt Is Delayed Output an pouce m Used to detect restriking faults DT curve m Used for coordination with electromechanical relays IDMT curve I m May be blocked if necessary I l gt Is Pick Up Signal E In mr H Equation for IDMT Timer Hold Curve l Cg TI l I l Equation t I x 1 where l TMS a m Tri un s DE51630 I pping Value of Internal Time Delay Counter T1 Timer hold setting timer hold for reset 0 and TMS 1 T Tripping time delay setting at 10 Is p Basic tripping curve value at a 10 1 tr B g a a T1 H gt 0 1 Is 0 1 Ils Timer Hold Dependent on Current Constant Timer Hold 62 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Implementing Inverse Definite Minimum Time Curves Examples of Problems to be Solved Problem 1 Given the type of inverse definite minimum time IDMT determine the Is current and time delay T
186. istor Rc Schneider 63230 216 208C1 155 D Electric Installation Communication Accessories Selection Guide There are 2 types of Sepam relay communication accessories m Communication interfaces which are essential for connecting Sepam to the communication network m Converters and other accessories as options which are used for complete implementation of the communication network Communication Interface Selection Guide Type of Network S LAN or E LAN S LAN or E LAN S LAN or E LAN S LAN E LAN S LAN E LAN Protocol Modbus u L L DNPS3 L L IEC 60870 5 103 Physical Interface RS485 2 Wire L L 4 Wire n Fiber Optic ST Star Ring m2 See Details on Page 158 159 160 161 161 1 Only one connection possible S LAN or E LAN 2 Except with the Modbus protocol Converter Port to Supervisor 1 RS232 Port Converter Selection Guide 1 2 wire RS485 Port 1 2 wire RS485 Port 1 Ethernet Port 10T 100Tx Auto 1 Ethernet Port 10 100 Base Tx and 1 Ethernet Port 100 Base FX Port to Sepam 1 2 Wire RS485 Port 1 2 Wire RS485 Port 1 2 Wire RS485 Port 1 2 wire RS485 or 4 wire RS485 Port 2 2 Wire RS485 or 4 Wire RS485 Ports Distributed Power Supply RS485 Supplied by ACE Supplied by ACE Supplied by ACE Not Supplied by EGX Not Supplied by EGX Protocol Modbus L L 7 L IEC 60870 5 103
187. ith 12 V DC or 24 V DC Note The shield connection should be grounded at only one end of the serial daisy chain A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Check that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 158 63230 216 208C1 S RECS 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Installation ACE959 4 wire RS485 Network Interface Function The ACE959 interface performs 2 functions m Electrical interface between the Sepam relay and a 4 wire RS485 communication network m Main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a PE50023 CCA612 cord Characteristics Weight 0 441 Ib 0 2 kg Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Operating Temperature 13 to 158 F 25 to 70 C Environmental Characteristics Same Characteristics as Sepam Base Units Standard EIA 4 Wire RS485 Differential Distributed Power Supply External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 16 mA in Receiving Mode 40 mA Maximum in Sending Mode Power Consumption DE80036 Number of Maximum Length with Maximum Length with Sepam Relay Units 12 V DC Power Supply 24 V DC Power Supply 5 1000 ft
188. ive breaker opening When the circuit breaker control function is used the breaker failure function is activated automatically by protection units 50 51 50N 51N and 46 which trip the breaker However the user may set the protective functions that activate the breaker failure function When the circuit breaker control function is not used the user has the choice of overcurrent protection functions to associate with the breaker failure protection function The protection delayed output should be assigned to a logic output using the control matrix Launching and stopping the time delay counter T both depend on the presence of a current above the set point I Is or according to the parameter setting on the absence of breaker opening Block Diagram Activation by 50 51 50N 51N 46 DE80107 I Is Logic Input Circuit Breaker Closed Time Delayed 124 External Tripping 5 Output Pick Up Signal Setting D Without Taking into Account Circuit Breaker Position With Taking into Account Circuit Breaker Position Note When an external trip command is issued on input 124 of an MES114 module configured for AC operation the 50BF operating characteristics are not guaranteed 48 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Breaker Failure ANSI Code 50BF Setting Example The example belo
189. l Fault u 46 Disturbance Recording Blocked u L L 47 Thermal Protection Blocked L 7 48 RTD Fault E L Address Word 0104 TS49 to TS64 Bit Address 1040 to 104F TS Use S20 S23 T20 T23 M20 B21 B22 49 Protection 38 49T Alarm Set Point Sensor 1 u L 50 Protection 38 49T Tripping Set Point Sensor 1 L L 51 Protection 38 49T Alarm Set Point Sensor 2 L 52 Protection 38 49T Tripping Set Point Sensor 2 53 Protection 38 49T Alarm Set Point Sensor 3 L L L 54 Protection 38 49T Tripping Set Point Sensor 3 u 55 Protection 38 49T Alarm Set Point Sensor 4 L L 56 Protection 38 49T Tripping Set Point Sensor 4 57 Protection 38 49T Alarm Set Point Sensor 5 L L 58 Protection 38 49T Tripping Set Point Sensor 5 u 59 Protection 38 49T Alarm Set Point Sensor 6 L 60 Protection 38 49T Tripping Set Point Sensor 6 61 Protection 38 49T Alarm Set Point Sensor 7 L 62 Protection 38 49T Tripping Set Point Sensor 7 u 63 Protection 38 49T Alarm Set Point Sensor 8 L 64 Protection 38 49T Tripping Set Point Sensor 8 E Schneider D Electric 63230 216 208C1 99 Modbus Communication Use of Remote Control Commands Remote control commands are pre assigned to protection control and metering functions Remote control commands may be carried out in two modes m Direct mode m Confirmed SBO select before operate mode
190. l Rights Reserved ectric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Synchronization Zone The synchronization zone contains the absolute date and time for the time tagging function Time messages should be written in a single block containing 4 words using function 16 write word Messages can be read word by word or by groups of words using function 3 Synchronization Zone Word Address Access Modbus Function Enabled Binary Time Year 0002 Read Write 3 16 Binary Time Months Days 0003 Read 3 Binary Time Hours Minutes 0004 Read 3 Binary Time ms 0005 Read 3 See Time Tagging of Events for data format Identification Zone The identification zone contains system type information pertaining to the identification of the Sepam equipment Some of the information in the identification zone is also found in the configuration zone at the address FCOOh Modbus Identification Zone Word Address Access Function Format Value Enabled Manufacturer Identification 0006 Read 3 0100 Equipment 0007 Read 3 0 Marking Equipment Type 0008 Read 3 Idem FCO1 Modbus Version 0009 Read 3 Idem FCO2 Application Version 000A B Read 3 Not Managed 0 Sepam Check Word 000C Read 3 Idem 0100 Synthesis Zone 000D Read 3 Not Managed 0 Command 000E Read Write 3 16 Not Managed Init to O Extension Address 000F Read 3 FCOO This zone is provided to ensure compatibility with existing equipment A more complete descripti
191. ld delay T1 m Definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves gt Is Time Delayed Output j gt Is Pick Up Signal l Value of Internal Time Delay Counter l j l E m i Tripping l DR nm RE x T1 I 46 63230 216 208C1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Protection Functions Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 50 51 m Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves gt Is Time Delayed Output MT10527 gt Is Pick Up Signal EI Value of Internal Time Delay I I l 7 L I l Counter I I Characteristics Tripping Curve Setting Definite Time DT IDMT Chosen According to List on Previous Page Is Set Point Setting DT 0 1 IN lt Is x 24 In Expressed in Amps IDMT 0 1 IN Is x 2 4 IN Expressed in Amps Resolution 1A or 1 Digit Accuracy 1 5 or 0 01 IN Drop Out Pick Up Ratio 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 02 In Is x 100 Time Delay T Operation Time at 10 Is Setting DT inst 50 ms lt T lt 300 s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Accuracy 1 DT 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer Hold Delay T1 Definite Time Timer Hold 0 0 05 300 s Inverse Definite Minimum Time 0 5 20s Reset Time 9 Characteristic Times Operation Time Pick Up 35 ms at 2 Is typically 25 ms Con
192. le and following a communication problem The event table is numbered for this purpose acknowledges by writing the exchange word while Sepam updates its event table The exchange word includes two fields m Most significant byte exchange number 8 bits 0 255 Event Table Structure b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b09 b08 Structure of the first event table m Exchange word 0040h W Event number 1 0041h 0048h Exchange Number 0 255 m Event number 2 Description of the MS Byte of the Exchange Word 0049h 0050h m Event number 3 The exchange number includes a byte that identifies the exchanges This byte is 0051h 0058h initialized to zero when Sepam is energized When it reaches its maximum value m Event number 4 FFh it automatically returns to 0 Sepam numbers the exchanges and the master 0059h 0060h acknowledges the numbering Structure of the second event table m Least significant byte number of events 8 bits 0 4 m Exchange word 0070h m Event number 1 b07 b06 nos b04 bO3 bo2 bot boo 0071h 0078h m Event number 2 0079h 0080h m Event number 3 Number of Events 0 4 0081h 0088h m Event number 4 Description of LS Byte of the Exchange Word 0089h 0090h Sepam indicates the number of significant events in the event table in the least Note The events sent by Sepam relays are not significant byte
193. lf duplex single pair transmission The ACE9092 converter also provides a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam relay ACE9492 ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces The communication settings should be the same as the Sepam and supervisor communication settings Characteristics 0 617 Ib 0 280 kg On Symmetrical or Asymmetrical DIN rail Power Supply Galvanic Isolation between ACE Power Supply and Frame and between ACE Power Supply and Interface Supply Galvanic Isolation between RS232 and RS485 Interfaces Protection by Time Delayed Fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 0 2 in x 0 79 in 110 240 V AC 10 47 63 Hz 2000 Vrms 60 Hz 1 min 1000 Vrms 60 Hz 1 min 1 A Rating Data Format 11 Bits 1 start 8 data 1 parity 1 stop Transmission Delay 100 ns Distributed Power Supply for Sepam Interfaces 12 V DC or 24 V DC Maximum Number of Sepam Interfaces with 12 Distributed Supply Operating Temperature 23 131 F 5 to 55 C Fast Transient Bursts 5 ns 60255 22 4 4 kV with Capacitive Tie Breaker in Common Mode 2 kV with Direct Tie Breaker in Common Mode 1 kV with Direct Tie Breaker in Differential Mode 1 kV Common Mode 0 5 kV Differential Mode 3 kV Common Mode 1 kV Differential Mode 1 MHz Damped Oscillating Wave 60255 22 1 1 2 50 us Impulse Waves 60255 5 Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
194. lue Keys for Parameter and Protection Setting Data Entry Principles Default Parameter Setting Commissioning Principles and Method Testing and Metering Equipment Required General Examination and Preliminary Actions Checking Parameter and Protection Settings Checking Phase Current Input Connections 1 A 5 A Current Transformers LPCT Type Current Sensors Checking the Residual Current Input Connection Checking Phase Voltage Input Connections Checking the Residual Voltage Input Connection Checking Logic Input and Output Connections Validation of the Complete Protection Chain Checking Optional Module Connections Test Sheet Maintenance Schneider 63230 216 208C1 D Electric 172 173 173 174 175 176 177 182 182 183 183 184 186 188 189 191 192 193 194 195 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 171 Use 172 63230 216 208C1 User Machine Interfaces Sepam Relay User Machine Interfaces Two different levels of user machine interface UMI are offered on the front panel of Sepam relays m Basic UMI with LEDs for installations operated via a remote system with no need for local operation m Advanced UMI with a keypad and a graphic LCD display giving access to all the information necessary for local operation and Sepam relay parameter setting SFT2841 Setting and Operating Software The UMI on the front panel of Sepam relays can be connected to the SFT2841 PC software tool which is
195. ly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional ground m Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS485 RS485 Converters Function The ACE919 converters are used to connect a master central computer equipped with an RS485 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2 wire RS485 network Without requiring any flow control signals the ACE919 converters perform network polarization and impedance matching The ACE919 converters also provide a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE9492 ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces There are 2 types of ACE919 converter m ACE919CC DC powered m ACE919CA AC powered Characteristics 0 617 Ib 0 280 kg On Symmetrical or Asymmetrical DIN rail Power Supply 110 250 V AC 24 48 V DC 20 10 47 to 63 Hz Protection by Time Delayed Fuse 1 A Rating 1 A Rating 0 2 x 0 79 in 5 x 20 mm Galvanic Isolation between ACE Power Supply and Frame and Between ACE Power Supply and Interface Supply 2000 Vrms 60 Hz 1 min Data Format 11 bits 1 Start 8 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop 100 ns 12 V DC or 24 V DC Transmission Delay Distributed Power Supply for Sepam Interfaces Maximum Number of Sepam Interface
196. m Selection by the master of the command to be sent by writing of the bit in the STC word and checking of the selection by rereading the word Note STC refers to a word in the Modbus communication section that describes remote control TC tele control commands through software m Execution of the command to be sent by writing of the bit in the TC word Configuring the Physical Layer of the ACE969 E LAN Port The E LAN port on the ACE969TP and ACE969FO communication interfaces is a 2 wire RS485 port The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the E LAN port are m Sepam relay address m Transmission speed m Parity check type The number of stop bits is always fixed at 1 If a configuration with Parity has been selected each character will contain 11 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1parity bit 1 stop bit If a No Parity configuration has been selected each character will contain 10 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit Parameters Authorized Values Default Value Sepam Address 1 to 247 1 Speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 Baud 38400 Baud Parity None Even or Odd Odd Configuration Tips m The Sepam relay s address MUST be assigned before it is connected to the communication network m Set the other physical layer configuration parameters before making the connection to the communication network m Modifying the configuration parameters during normal operation will not disturb Sepam but will reset the c
197. m is launched It lets you choose the language for the SFT2841 screens and provides access to the Sepam parameter and protection setting files m In disconnected mode you can open or create a parameter and protection setting file for a Sepam Series 20 Sepam Series 40 or Sepam Series 80 m While connected to a single Sepam unit you can access the parameter and protection setting file for the Sepam unit currently connected to the PC m While connected to a Sepam network you can access the parameter and protection setting files for a group of Sepam units connected to the PC via a communication network Language of SFT2841 Screens The SFT2841 software user can opt to run the program in US English UK English French or Spanish The desired language is selected at the top of the SFT2841 welcome window Using SFT2841 in Disconnected Mode Disconnected mode allows you to prepare parameters and settings files for Sepam Series 20 Sepam Series 40 and Sepam Series 80 prior to commissioning The parameter and protection setting files prepared in disconnected mode will be downloaded later to the Sepam units when in connected mode m To create a new parameter and protection setting file click on the icon D relevant Sepam family Sepam Series 20 Sepam Series 40 or Sepam Series 80 m To open an existing parameter and protection setting file click on the icon a for the relevant Sepam family Sepam Series 20 Sepam Series 40 or Se
198. modem or by setting switches see the modem manufacturer s manual The PC can use an internal or an external modem This modem on the PC side is always the calling modem It must be installed and configured in accordance with the Windows modem installation procedure Configuration of the Calling Modem in SFT2841 When configuring a Sepam network SFT2841 displays the list of all the modems installed on the PC The communication parameters to be defined are m Modem o Select one of the modems listed by SFT2841 m Telephone Number o Number of the remote modem to be called m Speed o 4800 Baud o 9600 Baud o 19200 Baud o 38400 Baud m Parity o None not adjustable m Handshake o None n RTS n RTS CTS m Time out o 100 3000 ms Communication via modem and telephone network is slowed considerably because of the transit time through the modems A time out of between 800 1000 ms is sufficient in most 38400 baud installations In some cases the poor quality of the telephone network may require a slower speed 9600 or 4800 bauds The time out value should then be increased 2 3 s with the number of retries from 1 3 Note The speed and parity of the calling modem must be configured in Windows with the same values as for SFT2841 63230 216 208C1 179 D Electric PE50590 Use SFT2841 Setting and Operating Software Configuration of a Sepam Network a Configuration of called Modem N a The modem on the Sepam side is the c
199. mps IEC 60255 21 2 2 20 Gn 16 ms For Operation Exposure to Cold IEC 60068 2 1 Series 20 Ab 13 F 25 C Exposure to Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 2 Series 20 Bb 158 F 70 C Continuous Exposure to Damp Heat IEC 60068 2 3 Ca 10 days 9396 RH 104 F 40 C Temperature Variation with Specified Variation Rate IEC 60068 2 14 Nb 13 to 158 F 25 to 470 C 5 C min Salt Mist IEC 60068 2 52 Kb 2 Influence of Corrosion 2 Gas Test IEC 60068 2 60 C 21 days 75 RH 77 F 25 C 0 5 ppm HS 1 ppm SO Influence of Corrosion 4 Gas Test IEC 60068 2 60 21 days 75 RH 77 F 25 C 0 01 ppm HS 0 2 ppm SO 0 02 ppm NO 0 01 ppm Cl For Storage Exposure to Cold IEC 60068 2 1 Ab 13 F 25 C Exposure to Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 2 Bb 158 F 70 C Continuous Exposure to Damp Heat IEC 60068 2 3 Ca 56 days 93 RH 104 F 40 C Enclosure Safety Tests Front Panel Tightness IEC 60529 IP52 Other Panels Closed Except for Rear Panel IP20 NEMA Type 12 Gasket Integrated or Supplied Acc to Model Fire Wthstand Electrical Safety Tests IEC 60695 2 11 1200 F 650 C with Glow Wire 1 2 50us Impulse Wave IEC 60255 5 5 kV 0 Power Frequency Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255 5 2 kV 1 min 2 ANSI C37 90 1 kV 1 min Indication Output 1 5 kV 1 min Control Output ce Harmonized Standard European Directives EN 50263 m 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility
200. ms m Maximum length 6 6 ft 2 m The CSH30 interposing ring CT must be installed near the Sepam relay the CSH30 link cable is less than 6 6 ft 2 m long Also flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in the Sepam relay do not ground the cable by any other means Schneider 63230 216 208C1 143 D Electric PE50037 DE80120 Installation ACE990 Zero Sequence CT Interface E1E2E3E4E5 mE S1 S2 ACE 990 144 63230 216 208C1 ACE990 Zero Sequence CT Interface Function The ACE990 is used to adapt measurements between an MV zero sequence CT with a ratio of 1 n 50 lt n lt 1500 and the Sepam residual current input Characteristics Weight 1 41 Ib 0 64 kg Assembly Mounted on Symmetrical DIN rail Amplitude Accuracy 1 Phase Accuracy lt 2 Maximum Permissible Current 20kA 1s On the primary winding of an MV zero sequence CT with a ratio of 1 50 that does not saturate Operating Temperature 23 to 131 F 5 to 55 C Storage Temperature 13 to 4158 F 25 to 470 C Description and Dimensions S ACE990 input terminal block for connection of the zero sequence CT ACE990 output terminal block for connection of the Sepam relay residual current Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Lp Electric DE51682 Installation Example Giv
201. mum Time 0 5 20 s IDMT Reset Time Presence of Current 0 2 2 IN Operating Time 0 05 300 s 1 Tripping as of 1 2 Is 26 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Functions Setting Ranges Tripping Time Delay Timer Hold Tripping Curve Definite Time DT DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Isr Set Point 0 1 15 INr DT Inst 0 05 300 s 0 1 1 INr IDMT 0 1 12 5 s at 10 Isr Timer Hold Definite Time DT Timer Hold Inst 0 05 300 s Inverse Definite Minimum Time 0 5 20 s IDMT Reset Time 50 150 of Vip 0 05 300 s 2 80 of Vp 0 05 300 s Starts per Period 1 60 Period 1 6 hrs Consecutive Starts 1 60 Time Between Starts 0 90 min 50 53 Hz or 60 63 Hz 0 1 300 s 45 50 Hz or 55 60 Hz 0 1 300 s 0 1 10 Hz s Inst 0 15 300 s 1 Tripping as of 1 2 Is 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Se 63230 216 208C1 27 ectric Protection Functions Phase to Phase Undervoltage ANSI Code 27P Operation The 3 phase protection function m Picks up if one of the 3 phase to phase voltages drops below the V s set point m Includes a definite time delay T Block diagram Vab MT10873 Vbc gt Time Delayed Output Vea Pick Up Signal Characteristics Vs Set Point Setting 5 1
202. n 0 2 2 5 mm AWG 24 12 O 2 wires with maximum cross section of 0 00003 0 0016 in 0 2 1 mm AWG 24 18 a Stripped length 0 315 to 0 39 in 8 10 mm m Wiring with fittings o Terminal 5 recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 0 0023 in 1 5 mm AWG 16 DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 0 0016 in 1 mm AWG 18 a Cable length 0 32 in 8 2 mm a Stripped length 0 31 in 8 mm Schneider 63230 216 208C1 149 D Electric DE50566 Installation Optional Remote Modules MET1482 MSA141 or DSM303 Connection The optional MET1482 MSA141 or DSM303 modules are connected to the base unit connector D by a series of links using prefabricated cords which come in 3 different lengths with black fittings m CCA770 L 2 ft or 0 6 m m CCA772 L 6 6 ft or 2 m m CCA774 L 13 1 ft or 4 m The DSM303 module can only be connected at the end of the series The MSA141 module must be the first one connected to the Sepam unit The diagram below shows the maximum configuration with 3 optional modules CCA612 11 ACE949 2 2 Wires or ACE959 4 Wires or ACE937 Fiber Optic Module 150 63230 216 208C1 wvvvvvvvvvvv d Y vYYVYYVYVYYVYYYY x LA CCA770 MSA141 Module MET148 2 CCA772 Module or CCA774 DSM303 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric PE50021 DE80121 Installation
203. n 1 min Running Hours Counter Operating Time 0 65535 hrs 1 or 0 5 hrs o Starting Current 1 2 lg to 24 IN 5 Hu Starting Time 0 300 s 300 ms o Number of Starts Before Blocking 0 60 1 Block Start Time 0 360 min 1 min Switchgear Diagnosis Assistance Cumulative Breaking Current 0 65535 kA 10 o Number of Operations 0 4 10 1 Hu Operating Time 20 100 ms 1ms o Charging Time 1 20 s 0 5 s o m Available on MSA141 analog output module according to setup o Saved in the event of auxiliary supply outage 1 Typical accuracy see details on subsequent pages 2 Measurement up to 0 02 IN for information purposes 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Se 63230 216 208C1 11 ectric Metering Functions 12 63230 216 208C1 Phase Current amp Residual Current Phase Current Operation This function gives the RMS value of the phase currents based on RMS current measurement accounting for up to the 17th harmonic m la phase a current m b phase b current m Ic phase c current Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced user machine interface UMI by pressing the amp key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link m An analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement Range 0 1 1 5 IN CO Unit A or kA Accuracy typically 196 2 2 from 0 3 1 5 IN 5 if 0
204. n N O or normally closed N C contacts parameter set on the front of the advanced UMI or in SFT2841 m Latching contactors with normally closed contacts Two breaking device control modes are available m Use of the operating mechanism integrated in the circuit breaker contactor to process all circuit breaker closing and tripping conditions based on o Breaking device status information o Remote control operation o Protection functions o Specific program logic for each application e g recloser Note This function also blocks closing of the breaking device according to the operating conditions m Use of customized program logic with a control and monitoring resource assignment matrix Operating Mechanism Integrated in the Circuit Breaker Contactor For operation in accordance with the block diagram the Sepam relay must have the required logic inputs therefore an MES114 module must be included and the related parameters set and wiring done Remote control Circuit breaker contactor tripping can be controlled remotely via the communication link using the following remote control commands m TC1 Circuit breaker contactor tripping m TC2 Circuit breaker contactor closing m TC5 Sepam relay acknowledgment reset These commands can be blocked globally by logic input 125 According to the parameter setting of logic input 125 the tripping remote control TC1 can be activated or blocked at any time Circuit Breaker Contactor
205. n Zone Word Address Access Function Format Enabled Modbus Address FCOO Read 3 Slave no Sepam Type MSB FCO1 Read 3 1 Hardware Configuration LSB Coupler Type MSB FC02 Read 3 2 Version LSB Application Identification Type of Application FC10 15 Read 3 ASCII 12 Characters S20 M20 etc Application Version FC16 18 Read 3 ASCII 6 Characters Application Marking FC19 22 Read 3 ASCII 20 Characters 1 FCO1 word MSB 10h Sepam LSB hardware configuration 2 FCO2 word MSB 01h Sepam LSB XY communicationversion X Y T 5 Bit 7 6 MES114E 4 3 2 1 0 Option UD UX reserved MES114F DSM303 MSA141 MET1482 3 MES114 MES108 UX Model 0 0 x x x y y UX Model 1 0 0 x x y y 3 or MET148 x 1 if option included y 1 if option included exlusive options z 1 if Vac set up 96 63230 216 208C1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Data Encoding For All Formats If a measurement overruns the maximum permissible value for the related format the value read for the measurement will be the maximum permissible value for the format Format 16 NS All information is encoded in a 16 bit word in absolute value unsigned binary format The zero bit bO is the least significant bit in the word Format 16 S Signed Measurements Temperatures The information is encoded in a 16 bit word as a complement of 2 for example m 0001 represents 1
206. n exception reply incorrect address The configuration and data files are read in their entirety in Sepam They are transferred adjacently 63230 216 208C1 115 D Electric Modbus Communication Reading Sepam Identification If the master requests more exchanges than necessary the exchange number remains unchanged and the number of usable bytes is forced to 0 To guarantee the data transfers it is necessary to allow a response time of about 500 ms between each reading operation at 2300h The first word transmitted is an exchange word The exchange word comprises two fields m Most Significant Byte contains the exchange number It is incremented by 1 by the Sepam relay each time a successful transfer takes place When it reaches the value FFh it automatically resets to zero m Least Significant Byte contains the number of usable bytes in the data zone It is initialized to zero after energizing and must be different from FFh The exchange word may also have the following values m xxyy the number of usable bytes in the data zone yy must be different from FFh m 0000h no read request frame has been formulated yet as it is the case in particular when the Sepam is switched on The other words are not significant m FFFFh the request frame has been processed but the results in the reply zone are not yet available It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading The other words are not significant The words which foll
207. n of a fault that causes tripping of the breaking device by the Sepam relay Procedure 1 Select one of the protection functions that trips the breaking device 2 According to the type of Sepam device inject a fault current or voltage 3 Observe the tripping of the breaking device 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Se 63230 216 208C1 201 ectric Commissioning Checking Optional Module Connections Checking Temperature Sensor Input Connections to the MET1482 Module The temperature monitoring function provided by Sepam T20 T23 or M20 units checks the connection of each sensor that is configured An RTD FAULT alarm is generated whenever one of the sensors is detected as being short circuited or disconnected absent To identify the faulty sensor or sensors 1 Display the temperature values measured by Sepam T20 or M20 using the SFT2841 software 2 Check the consistency of the temperatures measured o The temperature displayed is if the sensor is short circuited T lt 31 F T lt 35 C o The temperature displayed is if the sensor is disconnected T 401 F T 205 C Checking the Analog Output Connection to the MSA141 Module 1 Identify the measurement associated by parameter setting with the analog output using the SFT2841 software 2 Simulate if necessary the measurement linked to the analog output by injection 3 Checkthe consistency between the value measured by Sepam and the indic
208. n the MET or MSA module faulty steadily on m The display shows a partial fault message and indicates the type of fault by a code o Code 1 inter module link fault o Code 3 MET module unavailable a Code 4 MSA module unavailable m Sepam with remote advanced UMI UX base DSM303 o ON LED on o amp LED on the base unit flashing o J LED on the MET or MSA module faulty steadily on othe display indicates the type of fault by a code same as above m Special case of faulty DSM303 o ON LED on Hu 9 LED on the base unit flashing o IN LED on DSM303 steadily on o Display off This Sepam operating mode is also transmitted via the communication link RTD Fault Each temperature monitoring function when activated detects whether the temperature sensor associated with the MET1482 module is short circuited or disconnected When this is the case the alarm message RTD FAULT is generated Since this alarm is common to the 8 functions the identification of the faulty sensor or sensors is obtained by looking up the measured values m Measurement displayed if the sensor is short circuited T lt 31 F T lt 35 C m Measurement displayed if the sensor is disconnected T 4401 F T gt 205 C Replacement and Repair When Sepam or a module is considered to be faulty have it replaced by a new product or module since the components cannot be repaired 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Schn
209. n the rear panel of the Sepam relay Connecting and Assembling the CCA634 Connector 1 Open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals Remove the shields if necessary to make wiring easier If removed they must be replaced after wiring 2 According to the wiring required remove or reverse the bridging strap This is used to link either terminals 1 2 and 3 or terminals 1 2 3 and 9 see picture opposite 3 Use terminal 7 1 A or 8 5 A to measure the residual current according to the CT secondary 4 Connect the wires using 0 16 in 4 mm ring lugs and check the tightness of the 6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits The connector accommodates wires with cross sections of 0 0023 0 0093 in 1 5 6 mm AWG 16 10 The wires only exit from the base 5 Close the side shields 6 Insert the connector pins into the slots on the base unit 7 Flatten the connector against the unit to plug it into the 9 pin SUB D connector principle similar to that of the MES module 8 Tighten the mounting screw 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved PE50031 DE51674 Installation CLP1 LPCT Sensor dL e IL 25 amp 125A 10000000 50 amp 250A 01000000 100 amp 500A 00100000 1338666A 20010000 200 amp 1000A 00001000 320 amp 1600A 00000100 400 amp 2000A 00000010 OR 31504 00000001 LPCT settings Check plug LPCT Type C
210. nal Test Box Voltage Generator Turn on the generator Apply the VT secondary rated phase to neutral voltage V s V3 Use the SFT2841 software to check the residual voltage value Vr Vr should be equal to the VT primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vj p V3 or Vip if the VTs deliver Vj s V3 to the secondary circuit Vr should be equal to the VT primary rated phase to phase voltage V p or V3 V p if the VTs deliver V s 3 to the secondary circuit Turn off the generator Put the cover back on the test terminal box o O1 BR ND 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 199 ectric MT10588 MT10589 Commissioning leix Z EE EE a 233222 JEJE CSS RO reci Mr c Sepesbm K Parameter noting Farcw comcs esatied SOT 1728 SFT2841 Input output indicator status screen SF 12841 sene 20 Sapam connected General seams AEE f Est Sepa Prisons Opgeece Option Wigor 1 altri xj FO reed CC EL img Ramee If Ne SFT2841 Sepam Diagnosis output relay test screen Checking Logic Input and Output Connections Checking Logic Input Connections Procedure Proceed as follows for each input 1 If the input supply voltage is present use an electric cord to short circuit the contact that delivers logic data to the input 2 If the input supply voltage is not present apply a voltage supplied by the DC voltage generator to the
211. nce voltage frequency is above the set point and the positive sequence voltage is more than 20 of V p V p v3 If a single VT is connected Vab the function picks up when the frequency is higher than the set point and the Vab voltage is more than 20 of V p This VT includes a definite time delay T Block Diagram Vbc Vab MT10542 V1 1 V1 gt 0 2Vinp Time Delayed Output Pick Up Signal 1 Or Vab gt 0 2 Vj p if only one VT If there is only one sensor Vab the voltage signal is connected to terminals 1 and 2 of the connector CCT640 irrespective of phase Characteristics Fs Set Point Setting 50 53 Hz or 60 63 Hz Resolution 0 1 Hz Accuracy 1 0 1 Hz Pick Up Drop Out Difference 0 2 Hz 0 1 Hz Time Delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or x25 ms Resolution Characteristic Times Operation Time 10 ms or 1 Digit Pick Up 100 ms Typically 80 ms Overshoot Time 100 ms Reset Time 100 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 and df dt lt 3 Hz s Schneider D Electric 63230 216 208C1 57 Protection Functions Underfrequency ANSI Code 81L or 81U Operation The function picks up when the positive sequence voltage frequency is below the set point and if the negative sequence voltage is more than 20 of V p V p v3 If a single VT is connected Vab the function picks up when t
212. nd the Sepam connection window can be accessed in the work zone User Identification The window intended for the entry of the 4 digit password is activated m Via the Passwords tab m Via the Identification function in the Sepam menu m Via the Identification icon o The Return to Operating mode function in the Passwords tab removes access rights to parameter and protection setting mode Downloading of Parameters and Protection Settings Parameter and protection setting files can only be downloaded to the connected Sepam relay in Parameter setting mode Once the connection has been established the procedure for downloading a parameter and protection setting file is as follows 1 Activate the Download Sepam function in the Sepam menu 2 Select the rpg file which contains the data to be downloaded 3 Acknowledge the end of operation report Return to Factory Settings This operation only possible in the Parameter setting mode via the Sepam menu is used to reset all general characteristics protection settings and control matrix settings back to their default values Uploading of Parameters and Protection Settings The connected Sepam parameter and protection setting file can only be uploaded in Operating mode Once the connection has been established the procedure for uploading a parameter and protection setting file is as follows 1 Activate the Upload Sepam function in the Sepam menu 2 Select the rpg file that
213. ne of the three following protocols protocol is selected at the time of Sepam parameter setting n IEC 60870 5 103 a DNP3 o Modbus RTU m The E LAN Engineering Local Area Network port reserved for Sepam remote ACE969TP Communication Interface parameter setting and operation using the SFT2841 software PE50470 There are two versions of the ACE969 interfaces which are identical except for the S LAN port m ACE969TP o Twisted Pair a For connection to an S LAN network using a 2 wire RS485 serial link m ACE969FO H Fiber Optic a For connection to an S LAN network using a fiber optic connection star or ring PE50471 The E LAN port is always a 2 wire RS485 type port ACE969FO Communication Interface 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Se 63230 216 208C1 161 ectric Installation 162 63230 216 208C1 ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi Protocol Interfaces Characteristics Technical Characteristics Weight 0 628 Ib 0 285 kg Assembly On Symmetrical DIN rail Operating Temperature 13 to 4158 F 25 to 70 C Environmental Characteristics Same Characteristics as Sepam Base Units Power Supply Voltage 24 250 V DC 110 240 V AC Range 20 10 20 10 Maximum Burden 2W 3VA Inrush Current 10 A 100 us Acceptable Ripple Content 12 Acceptable Momentary Outages 20 ms Electrical Interface Standard EIA 2 wire RS485 Differential Distributed Power
214. ng of 2 wire RS485 network polarization and line impedance matching resistors Function swi 1 SW1 2 SW1 3 Polarization at 0 V via Rp 470 Q ON Polarization at 5 V via Rp 470 Q ON 2 Wire RS485 Network Impedance ON Matching by 150 Q Resistor Converter configuration when delivered m 12 V DC distributed power supply m 2 wire RS485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated Connection 2 Wire RS485 Link without Distributed Power Supply m To 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 screw type terminal block A m L L 2 wire RS485 signals m Shielding 2 Wire RS485 Link with Distributed Power Supply m To connector female 9 pin sub D m 2 wire RS485 signals L L m Distributed power supply V 12 V DC or 24 V DC V 0V Power Supply m To 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 screw type terminal block m Reversible phase and neutral ACE919CA m Grounded via terminal block and metal case ring lug on back of case Schneider 63230 216 208C1 169 D Electric Installation 170 63230 216 208C1 S ee 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Use 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents User Machine Interfaces SFT2841 Setting and Operating Software Welcome Window Presentation General Screen Organization Use of the Software Configuration of a Sepam Network UMI on Front Panel Presentation Advanced UMI Access to Data White Keys for Current Operation B
215. ng this product requires expertise in the field of electrical network protection Only competent qualified personnel should install or maintain this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire instruction set m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Before performing visual inspections tests or maintenance on this equipment disconnect all sources of electric power Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely de energized tested and tagged Pay particular attention to the power system design Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Beware of potential hazards carefully inspect the work area for tools and objects that may have been left inside the equipment m Wear properly rated personal protective equipment W The successful operation of this equipment depends upon proper handling installation and operation Neglecting fundamental installation requirements can lead to personal injury as well as damage to electrical equipment or other property m Before performing Dielectric Hi Pot or Megger testing on any equipment in which the relay is installed disconnect all input and output wires to the relay High voltage testing can damage electronic components contained in the Sepam relay unit Failure to follo
216. ns The phase current Ib is only assessed for metering functions assuming that Ir 0 This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current Parameters Sensor Type 5 ACTor1 ACT Number of CT la lc Rated Current IN 1 A to 6250 A 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Description Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer LPCT type sensors to the CCA670 connector The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes the Sepam relay to go into the fail safe position The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current Parameters Sensor Type LPCT Number of CT la Ib Ic Rated Current IN 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 or 3150 A Note Parameter IN must be set twice m Software parameter setting using the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software tool m Hardware parameter setting using microswitches on the CCA670 connector Schneider 63230 216 208C1 129 D Electric Installation Base Unit Other Current Input Connection Schemes Description Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents la Ib and Ic measured by 3 x 1 Aor 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors Note See current input connection diagrams DE80061 DE52520 DE80048 130 63230 216 208C1 CCA634 Parameters Residual Current Rated Residu
217. nstallation CSH120 and CSH200 zero sequence CT 140 e g 63230 216 208C1 CSH120 and CSH200 Zero Sequence CT Function The specifically designed CSH120 and CSH200 zero sequence CT are for direct residual current measurement The only difference between them is the diameter Due to their low voltage insulation they can only be used on insulated cables Characteristics Inner Diameter 4 7 in 120 mm 7 9 in 200 mm Weight 1 32 Ib 0 6 kg 3 09 Ib 1 4 kg Accuracy 5 at 68 F 20 C 6 max from 13 to 158 F 25 to 70 C Transformation Ratio 1 470 Maximum Permissible Current 20kA 1s Operating Temperature 13 to 158 F 25 to 470 C Storage Temperature 40 to 185 F 40 to 85 C Dimensions 4 horizontal mounting 4 vertical mounting holes 5 holes 5 DE10228 Dimensions A B D E F H J K L CSH120 in 4 75 6 46 1 73 7 48 2 99 1 57 6 54 244 1 38 mm 120 164 44 190 76 40 166 62 35 CSH200 in 7 87 10 1 1 81 108 472 2 36 10 1 4 09 1 46 mm 200 256 46 274 120 60 257 104 37 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Electric DE80021 Installation 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical cha
218. nt Range 0 360 min Unit min Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 1 min Refresh Interval 1 s Typical Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric Switchgear Diagnosis Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Cumulative Breaking Current amp Number of Operations Cumulative Breaking Current Operation This function indicates the cumulative breaking current in square kiloamperes kA for five current ranges The current ranges based on the fundamental component displayed are m O lt I lt 2IN 2In lt I lt 5IN 5 In I 10 IN 10 In lt lt 40 IN 40 IN The function also provides the total number of operations and the cumulative total of breaking current in kA Each value is saved in the event of a power failure Note Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information Number of Operations This function counts the number of times the tripping command activates the O1 relay This value is saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced user machine interface UMI by pressing the amp key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link The initial values may be introduced using the SFT2841 software tool to take into account the real state of a used breaking device Characteristics Breaking Current kA
219. nt min 17 Group B Cooling Time Constant min 18 Group B Initial Heat Rise Value ANSI 50 51 Phase Current Function Number O1xx Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Reserved 2 Group A Tripping Curve 3 Group A Is Set Point 0 1 A 4 Group A Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 5 Group A Timer Hold Curve 3 6 Group A Timer Hold Delay 10 ms 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 ON OFF 10 Group B Tripping Curve 2 11 Group B Is Set Point 0 1 A 12 Group B Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 13 Group B Timer Hold Curve 3 14 Group B Timer Hold Delay 10 ms 15 Reserved 16 Reserved Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric Modbus Communication Access to Remote Settings ANSI 50BF Breaker Failure Function Number 2101 Setting Data Format Unit 1 ON or OFF 2 Is Set Point 0 1A 3 Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 4 Use Close Position of Circuit Breaker 0 No 1 2 Yes ANSI 50N 51N or 50G 51G Ground Fault Function Number 02xx Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Reserved 2 Group A Tripping Curve 2 3 Group A Isr Set Point 0 1A 4 Group A Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 5 Group A Timer Hold Curve 3 6 Group A Timer Hold Delay 10 ms 7 Group A H2 Restraint 8 Reserved 9 ON OFF D 10 Group B Tripping Curve 2 11 Group B Isr Set
220. ntrol Group B TC4 Group A TC3 Schneider 63230 216 208C1 81 D Electric Control and Monitoring Functions Events may be indicated on the front panel of Sepam relays by the W Appearance of a message on the advanced UMI display m Lighting of one of the 9 yellow signal lamps Functions Phase Overcurrent Indications ANSI Code 30 Message Type Indication Predefined Messages All the messages connected to the standard Sepam relay functions are predefined and available in two language versions m In English factory messages not editable m In the local language depending on the version delivered o The language version is chosen at the time of parameter setting a The messages are visible on the display units of Sepam relays equipped with the advanced UMI and in the SFT2841 Alarms screen m The number and type of predefined messages depend on type of Sepam relay The table below gives the complete list of all predefined messages List of Messages 1 UK English Factory PHASE FAULT US English PHASE FAULT Ground Fault EARTH FAULT GROUND FAULT Blocking Ground Fault Overcurrent E F PROT BLOCK 50N 51N BLOCK Circuit Breaker Failure BREAKER FAILURE BREAKER FAILURE Th malverioud THERMAL ALARM THERMAL ALARM THERMAL TRIP THERMAL TRIP Negative Sequence Unbalance UNBALANCE UNBALANCE Locked Rotor ROTOR BLOCKING JAMMED STALL Locked Rotor
221. ntrol 50 51 1A 50 51 1B 50 51 2A 50 51 2B 50N 51N 1A 50N 51N 1B 50N 51N 2A 50N 51N 2B 46 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 208C1 49 D Electric DE50244 DE50246 Protection Functions Description The ground fault function comprises four independant elements divided into two groups of two settings called Group A and Group B respectively May be chosen by parameter setting m Operation with Group A or Group B exclusively with switching from one group to the other dependent on the state of logic input 113 exclusively or by remote control TC3 TC4 113 0 group A 113 1 group B m Operation with Group A and Group B active for four set point operation m Enabling disabling of each group of 2 elements A B Operation The ground fault protection function is single pole and activates if the ground fault current reaches the triggering set point Also its time delay may be a definite time DT or an inverse definite minimum time IDMT delay according to the tripping curves The protection function includes second harmonic restraint which provides greater stability when transformers are energized measurement of residual current by the sum of the 3 phase CTs Note The restraint function disables tripping regardless of the fundamental current and can be selected by the parameter settings Also the protection function can be blocked by input I23 for the S23 application only
222. ocking of the Thermal Overload Protection Function Tripping of the thermal overload protection function in the case of a motor may be locked out when required by the process by m Logic input 126 m Remote control command TC7 blocking thermal overload protection Remote control command TC13 may be used to enable the operation of the thermal overload protection func tion Taking into Account Two Transformer Operating Rates Power transformers often have two ventilation operating rates m ONAN Oil Natural Air Natural m ONAF Oil Natural Air Forced The two groups of thermal overload protection parameters enable both of these operating rates to be taken into account Switching from one group of thermal Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49RMS User Information The following information is available m Time before restart enabled in the case of a start blockage m Time before tripping with constant current m Heat rise See Machine Operation Assistance Functions on page 19 Characteristics Set Points Group A Group B Setting Es1 Alarm Set Point 50 300 50 300 Es2 Tripping Set Point 50 300 50 300 Es0 Initial Heat Rise 0 100 0 100 Resolution 1 1 Time Constants Setting T1 Running Heat Rise 1 120 min 1 120 min T2 Stopped Cooling 5 600 min 5 600 min Resolution 1 min 1 min Accounting for Negative Sequence Component Setting K 0 2 25 45 9 Maximum Equipment Temperature According to
223. of the exchange word Each non significant event word is initialized sorted chronologically to zero Note The master necessarily reads a block of 33 words E t Table Ack led t starting at the address 0040h 0070h or one word at the ven able Acknowleagmen address 0040h 0070h To inform Sepam that the block read by the master has been correctly received the master writes the number of the last exchange made in the Exchange number field and resets the Number of events field of the exchange word to zero After acknowledgment the 4 events in the event table are initialized to zero and the old acknowledged events are erased in Sepam Until the exchange word written by the master becomes X 0 where X number of the previous exchange that the master wishes to acknowledge the exchange word in the table remains at X number of previous events The Sepam relay only increments the exchange number when new events are present X 1 number of new events If the event table is empty Sepam performs no processing operations when the master reads the event table or the exchange word This data is binary encoded Clearing an Event Queue Writing a value xxFFh in the exchange word any exchange number event number FFh reinitializes the corresponding event queue all stored events not yet transmitted are deleted Sepam in Data Loss 1 No Data Loss 0 Status Sepam has an internal storage queue with a capacity of 64 events If the queue bec
224. omes saturated a data loss event is inserted by Sepam when each event table is read The detection of events stops and the most recent events are lost Data loss is managed independently for each of the two event tables When the tables are read at different rates data loss may occur at different times for each table or even in some cases appear only on the slowest channel Note The data loss bit of the Sepam check word corresponds to the status of the first reading table compatibility with earlier versions 102 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Modbus Communication 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Time Tagging of Events Description of Event Encoding An event is encoded in 8 words with the following structure Most Significant Byte Least Significant Byte Word 1 Type of Event 08 00 For Remote Annunciation Internal Data Logic Inputs Word 2 Event Address Refer to Bit Addresses 1000 to 105F Word 3 Reserved 00 00 Word 4 Falling Edge Disappearance or Rising Edge Appearance 00 00 Falling Edge 00 01 Rising Edge Word 5 Year 00 0 99 Year Word 6 Month Day 1 12 Month 1 31 Day Word 7 Hours Minutes 0 23 Hours 0 59 Minutes Word 8 Milliseconds 0 59999 Schneider 63230 216 208C1 103 D Electric DE50337 Modbus Communication Master Computer Network
225. ommunication port 63230 216 208C1 89 D Electric PE50587 Modbus Communication General characteristics LL Sepam configuration Passwords Input output and indicator status i Sepam general characteristics Sepam status Type of application Motor M20 Major fault r Communication Communication protocol MODBUS Communication interface version 2 2 Status Operational Data loss Number of frames received Number of frames received with errors SFT2841 Sepam Series 20 Diagnosis Screen Commissioning and Diagnosis Installing the Communication Network Preliminary Study Before installing any components first perform a technical study to obtain the following information about the communication network m The type of medium electrical or fiber optic m The number of Sepam units per network m The transmission speed m The ACE interfaces configuration m The Sepam parameter settings Sepam User Manual Install and connect all communication interfaces in accordance with the instructions in the Installation chapter of this manual Preliminary Checks Make the following preliminary checks m Check the CCA612 cord connection between the ACE interface and the Sepam base unit m Check the ACE Modbus communication port connection m Check the complete configuration of the ACE m For the ACE969 check the auxiliary power supply connection Checking the Operat
226. on Start STRT LOCKED ROT LOCKED ROTOR Excessive Starting Time LONG START LONG START Starts per Hour START BLOCK BLOCKED START Phase Undercurrent UNDER CURRENT UNDERCURRENT Phase to Phase Overvoltage OVERVOLTAGE OVERVOLTAGE Phase to Phase Undervoltage UNDERVOLTAGE UNDERVOLTAGE Positive Sequence Undervoltage UNDERVOLTAGE UNDERVOLTAGE UNDERVOLT V1 UNDERVOLT Van Phase to Neutral Undervoltage UNDERVOLT V2 UNDERVOLT Vbn UNDERVOLT V3 UNDERVOLT Vcn Neutral Voltage Displacement Vo FAULT Vr FAULT Overfrequency OVER FREQ OVER FREQ Underfrequency UNDER FREQ UNDER FREQ Rate of Change of Frequency ROCOF df dt Temperature Monitoring 2 OVER TEMP ALM OVER TEMP TRIP RTD S FAULT OVER TEMP ALM OVER TEMP TRIP RTD S FAULT Thermostat 8 THERMOS ALARM THERMOS TRIP THERMOST ALARM THERMOS TRIP Buchholz 3 BUCHHOLZ ALARM BUCHH GAS TRIP BUCHHOLZ ALARM BUCHH GAS TRIP Pressure 3 PRESSURE TRIP PRESSURE TRIP Thermistor PTC NTC THERMIST ALARM THERMIST ALARM THERMIST TRIP THERMIST TRIP Trip Circuit Supervision TRIP CIRCUIT TRIP CKT FAULT Circuit Breaker Contactor Control CONTROL FAULT CB CONTROL FAULT Recloser PERMANENT FAULT PERMANENT FAULT Recloser CLEARED FAULT CLEARED FAULT 1 Depending on the type of Sepam relay and whether equipped with advanced UMI or SFT2841 Messages by default the wording of the messages subject to change
227. on is available starting at address FCOOh in the configuration zone or using the identification read function First Events Zone The events zone contains a maximum of 4 time tagged events Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3 The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16 and read individually using function 3 Modbus Events Zone 1 Word Address Access Function Enabled Exchange Word 0040 Read Write 3 6 16 Event n 1 0041 0048 Read 3 Event n 2 0049 0050 Read 3 Event n 3 0051 0058 Read 3 Event n 4 0059 0060 Read 3 See Time Tagging of Events for data format Second Events Zone The events zone contains a maximum of 4 time tagged events Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3 The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16 and read individually using function 3 Modbus Events Zone 2 Word Address Access Function Enabled Exchange Word 0070 Read Write 3 6 16 Event n 1 0071 0078 Read 3 Event n 2 0079 0080 Read 3 Event n 3 0081 0088 Read 3 Event n 4 0089 0090 Read 3 See Time Tagging of Events for data format 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 93 ectric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Status Zone The status zone is a table which contains the Sepam check word pre assigned remote annunciation bits TS and logic inputs
228. onnected mode m A return to the factory settings in connected mode 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Default Parameter Setting S20 S23 T20 T23 M20 Applications Hardware Configuration m identification D Sepam xxxx m Model o UX without fixed advanced UMI m MES module Absent m MET module Absent m MSA module Absent m DSM module Present m ACE module Absent Output Parameter Setting m Outputs used O1 O4 m N O Output Contacts O1 O3 m N C Output Contacts O2 O4 m impulse mode no latched Program Logic m Circuit Breaker Control No m Zone Selective Interlocking No m Logic Input Assignment Not Used General Characteristics m Network Frequency 50 Hz m Group of Settings A m Enable Remote Setting no m Working Language English CT Rating 5 A Number of CTs 3 la Ib Ic Rated Current In 630 A Basic Current Ib 630 A Integration Period 5 min Residual Current 3l sum Pre trig for Disturbance Recording 36 Cycles Protection Functions m All the protection functions are Off m The settings comprise values and choices that are informative and consistent with the general default characteristics in particular rated current IN m Tripping behavior o Latching yes except for functions 50BF 49RMS 37 and 66 o Activation of output O1 yes except for functions 50BF and 66 o Disturbance recording triggering except for functions 50BF 48 51LR amp 66 Control Matrix Each Sepam has defa
229. ons for main functions o Also accessed via the menu bar m D Work zone o Tab boxes E Status bar o With information relating to the active document Alarm on Identification of the connection window SFT2841 operating mode connected or disconnected Type of Sepam E rer teras i ama Peng one cae ona AR OST 5 Sepam editing identification Example of Sepam configuration screen Identification level Sepam operating mode PC date and time SFT2841 serie 20 Sepam connected General settings Guided Navigation A guided navigation mode aids the in process of entering Sepam relay parameter and protection o settings It allows users to go through the data input screens in the natural order esa Ei The sequencing of screens in guided mode is 1 2 controlled by clicking on 2 icons on the toolbar m lt To go back to the previous screen m To go to the next screen The screens are linked up in the following order 1 Sepam configuration 2 Program logic 3 General characteristics 4 Setting screens for the protection functions available according to the type of Sepam 5 Control matrix Example of general characteristics screen On Line Help The user can refer to the on line help at any time via the command in the menu bar 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 175 ectric Use Not Connected to Sepam Mo
230. output module 2 MES114 o M MES114 Module Connectors o K MES114 Module Connector S DE52149 D S G G6 OG G O 6 6 O 6 6 O 6 6 6 O 6 6 6 8 fA o k ig SSOOSSOSSOSSS jo S 0880 880 88066 O3 M B ann die e en 8 11 126 lt 10 iQ o5 to gt 114 eee e ah ur 8 12 8 7 D 8 2347 5 yo acre ragen l 5 5 b ef a Dn ale em e 5 DIM 21 lt E5 B Dn 126 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric DE51131 Installation A CAUTION LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF NUISANCE TRIPPING If the Sepam is no longer supplied with power or is in fail safe position the protection functions are no longer active and all the Sepam output relays are dropped out Check that this operating mode and the watchdog relay wiring are compatible with your installation Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage and unwanted shutdown of the electrical installation 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Base Unit Connection Connection of the Base Unit The Sepam connections are made to the removable connectors located on the rear panel All the connectors are screw lockable A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qu
231. ow the exchange word make up the data zone Since the configuration and data files are adjacent a frame may contain the end of the configuration file and the beginning of the data file of a record It is up to the remote monitoring and control system software to reconstruct the files in accordance with the transmitted number of usable bytes and the size of the files indicated in the identification zone Acknowledging a Transfer To inform the Sepam that a record block that it has just read has been received correctly the master must write the number of the last exchange that it has carried out in the exchange number filed and set the number of usable bytes in the data zone of the exchange word to zero The Sepam only increments the exchange number if new acquisition bursts are present Rereading the Identification Zone To ensure that the record has not been modified during its transfer by a new record the master rereads the contents of the identification zone and ensures that the recovered record date is still present 116 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Modbus Communication 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Se 63230 216 208C1 117 ectric Modbus Communication 118 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Installation Contents Safety Instructions 120 Before Starting 120 Precautions 121 Equipment Identification 122 Base Unit 124
232. p 2 Activation Mode ay 11 Step 2 Isolation Time Delay 10 ms 12 Reserved 13 Step 3 Activation Mode KE 14 Step 3 Isolation Time Delay 10 ms 15 Reserved 16 Step 4 Activation Mode ay 17 Step 4 Isolation Time Delay 10 ms ANSI 81H Overfrequency Function Number 1301 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or Disabled D 2 Fs Set Point 0 1Hz 3 Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 4108 Reserved ANSI 81L Underfrequency Function Number 14xx Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or Disabled D 2 Fs Set Point 0 1 Hz 3 Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 4108 Reserved ANSI 81R Rate of Change of Frequency Function Number 1601 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or Disabled D 2 dFs dt Set Point 0 1 Hz s 3 Tripping Time Delay 10 ms 4to8 Reserved Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Modbus Communication Presentation The disturbance recording function is used to record analog and logical signals during a time interval Sepam Series 20 can store two records Each record is comprised of two files m Configuration file with suffix CFG m Data file with suffix DAT The data of each record may be transferred via the Modbus link It is possible to transfer 1 or 2 records to a remote monitoring and control system The record may be transferred as many times as possible until it is overwritten by a new record If a record is made by Sepam while the oldest record is being
233. p Ib Tripping Current 119 Read 3 4 16NS 10A Trip Ic Tripping Current 11A Read 3 4 16NS 10A Trip Ir Tripping Current 11B Read 3 4 16NS 1A Cumulative Breaking Current 11C Read 3 4 16NS 1 kA Number of Operations 11D Read 3 4 16NS 1 Operating Time 11E Read 3 4 16NS 1ms Charging Time 11F Read 3 4 16NS 1s Reserved 120 Read 3 4 EE Running Hours Counter 121 Read 3 4 16NS 1 hrs Thermal Capacity Used 122 Read 3 4 16NS Operating Time Before Overload Tripping 123 Read 3 4 16NS 1 min Waiting Time After Overload Tripping 124 Read 3 4 16NS 1 min Unbalance Ratio 125 Read 3 4 16NS lg Starting Time Overload 126 Read 3 4 16NS 0 1s Starting Current Overload 127 Read 3 4 16NS 1A Block Start Time Delay 128 Read 3 4 16NS 1 min Number of Starts Allowed 129 Read 3 4 16NS 1 Temperatures 1 8 12A 131 Read 3 4 16S 1 C Reserved 132 1EF Prohibited Note Only the measurements related to the Sepam function are significant The values of the others are zero 94 63230 216 208C1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Measurement Zone B20 B21 B22 types Modbus Measurements Word Address Access Function Format Unit Enabled Vab Phase to Phase Voltage x1 106 Read 3 4 16NS 1V Vbc Phase to Phase Voltage x1 107 Read 3 4 16NS 1V Vca Phase to Phase Voltage x1 108 Read 3 4 16NS 1V Van Phase to Neutral Voltage x1 109 Read
234. pam B21 or B22 Procedure 1 To apply a phase to neutral voltage to the phase 1 voltage input connect the single phase voltage generator to the test terminal box using the plug provided in accordance with the diagram below DE52246 o Sepam B21 B22 Terminal Test Box Voltage Generator Turn on the generator Apply the VT secondary rated phase to neutral voltage V s V3 Use the SFT2841 software to check that the phase to neutral voltage V1 is equal to the VT primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vi p 3 5 Ifthe residual voltage is calculated by taking the sum of the 3 voltages use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual voltage value is approximately equal to the VT primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vi p V3 Turn off the generator Proceed in the same way for the other 2 phase voltage inputs At the end of the test put the cover back on the test terminal box BON ono 198 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Commissioning Checking the Residual Voltage Input Connection Description Check to be carried out for Sepam B21 or B22 when the residual voltage is measured by 3 VTs on the secondary circuits connected in an open delta arrangement Procedure 1 Connectthe single phase voltage generator to the test terminal box using the plug provided in accordance with the diagram below DE52247 iO Jo o Termi
235. pam Relay Cold Curve Motor Cold Curve Motor Hot Curve Sepam Relay Hot Curve lt Starting at Vin Starting at 0 9 Vun Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49RMS Setting Examples Use of the Additional Setting Group When a motor rotor is locked or turning very slowly its thermal behavior is different than one with the rated load In such conditions the motor is damaged by overheating of the rotor or stator For high power motors rotor overheating is most often a limiting factor The thermal overload parameters chosen for operation with a low overload are no longer valid In order to protect the motor in this case excessive starting time protection may be used Nevertheless motor manufacturers provide the thermal resistance curves when the rotor is locked for different voltages at the time of starting Figure 4 Locked Rotor Thermal Resistance A Locked Rotor Motor Running MT10863 Time s 1 05 Figure 3 Hot Cold Curves Compatible with the Motor s Thermal Resistance via the Setting of an Initial Heat Rise EsO A 400 Time Before Tripping s 100 40 Adjusted Sepam Relay Cold Curve Motor Cold Curve Motor Hot Curve Sepam Relay Hot Curve lt Starting at Vun Starting at 0 9 VAN 63230 216 208C1 gt VIB gt VIB Schneider D Thermal Resistance Motor Running Thermal Resistance Motor Stopped Sepam
236. pam Series 80 Using SFT2841 Connected to a single Sepam Unit During commissioning the SFT2841 software is used while Connected to a single Sepam unit to m Upload download and modify Sepam relay parameters and settings m Have all the measurements and supporting data available for commissioning The PC loaded with the SFT2841 software is connected to the connection port on the front panel of the Sepam relay via an RS232 port using the CCA783 cord To open the parameter and protection setting file on the Sepam once it is connected to the PC click on the icon e Using SFT2841 Connected to a Sepam Network Connected to a Sepam network mode is used during operation to m Manage the protection system m Check the status of the power supply m Diagnose any incident occurring on the power supply The PC loaded with the SFT2841 software is connected to a group of Sepam units via a communication network connection via serial link telephone line or Ethernet This network forms the E LAN engineering network The connection window allows configuration of the Sepam network and provides access to the parameter and protection setting files of the Sepam units on the network To open the connection window click on the a icon See Configuration of a Sepam network for details of how to configure the E LAN engineering network from the connection window Schneider 63230 216 208C1 173 D Electric Use SFT2
237. pam general setting A CAUTION m Configured by microswitch on the CCA670 CCA671 connector HAZARD OF NON OPERATION m Set the microswitches for the CCA670 CCA671 connector before commissioning the device m Check that only one microswitch is in position 1 for each block L1 L2 L3 and that no microswitch is in the center position m Check that the microswitch settings on all 3 blocks are identical Failure to follow these instructions can cause incorrect operation Operating mode 1 Use a screwdriver to remove the shield located in the LPCT Settings zone the shield protects 3 blocks of 8 microswitches marked L1 L2 L3 2 On the L1 block set the microswitch for the selected rated current to 1 2 IN values per microswitch H The table of equivalencies between the microswitch settings and the selected rated current IN is printed on the connector o Leave the 7 other microswitches set to 0 3 Set the other 2 blocks of switches L2 and L3 to the same position as the L1 block and close the shield 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider D Electric 63230 216 208C1 137 DE51675 Installation 138 Output Input 63230 216 208C1 LPCT Type Current Sensors Test Accessories Accessory Connection Principle A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after r
238. pedance matching with load resistor Rc 150 o to be set to m n if the interface is not at one end of the network default position m Rc if the interface is at one end of the network Fiber Optic Communication Port 1 LEDs S LAN Port m Flashing Tx LED Sepam sending ACE969FO m Flashing Rx LED Sepam receiving 1 2 Rx female ST type connector Sepam receiving 3 Tx female ST type connector Sepam sending DE51865 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 lectric 163 DE52166 Installation 164 63230 216 208C1 ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi Protocol Interfaces Connection Power Supply and Sepam Relays m The ACE969 interface connects to connector C on the Sepam base unit using a 9 8 ft 3 m CCA612 cord green RJ45 fittings m The ACE969 interface must be supplied with 24 250 V DC or 110 230 V AC A DANGER is off functional ground HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibilit
239. play retrolighting can be activated by Ibz 1 61 A RMS pressing a key 4 nn Mas W A 9 Key Keypad with 2 Operating Modes 1 63A RMS o White Keys for Current Operation D Display of measurements X2 Display of switchgear network diagnosis data 8 Display of alarm messages 4 Resetting 5 Acknowledgment and clearing of alarms o Blue Keys Activated in Parameter and Protection Setting Mode 7 Access to protection settings 8 Access to Sepam parameter settings including date and time 1 Q Used to enter the 2 passwords required to change protection and parameter settings N b51 b gt 51 b gt SIN b gt gt 5IN ext Ooff Ylon Tip MT10822 The A V keys are used to browse through the menus and to scroll and accept the values displayed 6 Lamp Test Keys Switching on sequence of all the LEDs 1 Date time saved in case the auxiliary power supply fails 24 hours 182 63230 216 208C1 S RES 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Use Advanced UMI Access to Data Access to Measurements and Example Measurement Loop Parameters The measurements and parameters can be accessed Energizing using the metering diagnosis status and protection 3 of Sepam keys They are arranged in a series of screens as E shown in the diagram opposite m The data are split up by category into 4 loops Measurements Numerical Values associated with the following 4 keys a Key t
240. ply flush mounted and secured by its clips No additional screw type fastening is required HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions p m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Mounting Clamp DE51143 1 Mes e Presentthe product as indicated making sure the metal plate is correctly entered in the groove at the bottom o Tilt the product and press on the top part to clamp it with the clips 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Se 63230 216 208C1 125 ectric Installation Base Unit Description Sepam Components m Base Unit 1 o Base Unit Connector Power Supply Output Relays CSH30 120 200 or ACE990 Input Screw Type Connector Shown CCA620 or Ring Lug Connector CCA622 o B 1 A 5 A CT Current Input Connector CCA630 or CCA634 or LPCT Current Input Connector CCA670 or VT Voltage Input Connector CCT640 o Communication Module Link Connection white o D Remote Inter Module Link Connection black m Optional input
241. ponent m Van Phase a phase to neutral voltage m Vbn Phase b phase to neutral voltage m Vcn Phase c phase to neutral voltage Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced UMI by pressing the key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link m An analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement Range 0 05 1 2 Vj p 1 Unit Vor kV Accuracy 2 1 from 0 5 1 2 Vp 2 from 0 05 0 5 V p Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 1 V or 1 Digit Refresh Interval 1 s Typical 1 V p primary rated phase to neutral voltage V p Vip 3 2 At V p in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Residual Voltage amp Positive Sequence Voltage Residual Voltage Operation This function gives the value of the residual voltage Vr Vr is measured based on the measurement of the fundamental component m By taking the internal sum of the 3 phase voltages Vr Van Vbn Vcn m By an open wye delta VT Note Sometimes referred to as a wye broken delta Readout The measurement can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced user machine interface UMI by pressing the key m The display of a PC with the SFT284
242. qual to 2065 sec 34 min With a setting of T1 2 34 min the tripping time is obtained based on a cold state point 2 In this case it is equal to T1 0 3216 t 2 1665 sec i e 11 min which is compatible with the thermal resistance of the motor when cold The negative sequence factor is calculated using the equation defined on page 37 The parameters of the second thermal overload relay do not need to be set by default they are not taken into account 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider D Electric Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49RMS Setting Examples Example 3 In this example the following data are available m Motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold curves see the solid line curves Figure 1 m Cooling time constant T2 m Maximum steady state current Imax lg 1 1 Setting of Tripping Set Point Es2 Es2 Imax lg 120 Setting of Alarm Set Point Es1 Es1 90 I Ig 0 95 The time constant T1 is calculated so that the thermal overload protection trips after 100 s point 1 With t T1 0 069 1 14 2 and Es2 120 1008 _ 1449s 24min 0 069 Ti The tripping time starting from the cold state is equal to t 24min L 0 3567 gt T1 0 3567 513s point2 This tripping time see Figure 2 page 40 is too long since the limit for this overload current is 400 s point 2 If T1 is lowered the thermal overload protection
243. r The operation time for the current IA is t 1 80 x 0 8 1 44 s IA aa eE SEE Ts se Ne er tsa TEE eio Ts10 Lo gt 1 Als 10 Wis Table of K Values Me andiEGIA andiecis andico UT P ED qec eor MAC cw ACEI 1 0 3 062 62 005 62 272 200 226 1 1 24 700 1 90 000 1 471 429 1 2 534 22 461 136 228 330 606 19 033 45 678 122 172 1 2 12 901 45 000 225 000 545 905 2 216 11 777 65 390 157 946 9 413 34 628 82 899 1 5 5 788 18 000 79 200 179 548 1 736 5 336 23 479 55 791 3 891 17 539 36 687 2 0 3 376 9 000 33 000 67 691 1 427 3 152 10 199 23 421 2 524 7 932 16 178 2 5 2 548 6 000 18 857 35 490 1 290 2 402 6 133 13 512 2 056 4 676 9 566 3 0 2 121 4 500 12 375 21 608 1 212 2 016 4 270 8 970 1 792 3 249 6 541 3 5 1 858 3 600 8 800 14 382 1 161 1 777 3 242 6 465 1 617 2 509 4 872 4 0 1 676 3 000 6 600 10 169 1 126 1 613 2 610 4 924 1 491 2 076 3 839 4 5 1 543 2 571 5 143 7 513 1 101 1 492 2 191 3 903 1 396 1 800 3 146 5 0 1 441 2 250 4 125 5 742 1 081 1 399 1 898 3 190 1 321 1 610 2 653 5 5 1 359 2 000 3 385 4 507 1 065 1 325 1 686 2 671 1 261 1 473 2 288 6 0 1 292 1 800 2 829 3 616 1 053 1 264 1 526 2 281 1 211 1 370 2 007 6 5 1 236 1 636 2 400 2 954 1 042 1 213 1 402 1 981 1 170 1 289 1 786 7 0 1 188 1 500 2 063 2 450 1 033 1 170 1 305 1 744 1 135 1 224 1 607 7 5 1 146 1 385 1 792
244. r Electric All Rights Reserved G Electric Protection Functions Equation k T t I x a D gu B I Equation UU eer M n qa I Equation idea tg 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved I D Electric General Tripping Curves Current Inverse Definite Minimum Time Tripping Curves Multiple Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT tripping curves are offered to cover most applications m IEC curves SIT VIT LTI EIT m IEEE curves MI VI El m Commonly used curves UIT RI IAC 63230 216 208C1 IEC curves Coefficient Values Curve Type k a p Standard Inverse A 0 14 0 02 2 97 Very Inverse B 13 5 1 1 50 Long Time Inverse B 120 1 13 33 Extremely Inverse C 80 2 0 808 Ultra Inverse 315 2 2 5 1 RI Curve Equation 1 T t D Kam I 3 1706 0 339 0 236 I S IEEE Curves Curve Type Coefficient Values A B p B Moderately Inverse 0 010 0 023 0 02 0 241 Very Inverse 3 922 0 098 2 0 138 Extremely Inverse 5 64 0 0243 2 0 081 IAC Curves CRONE Coefficient Values A B C D E B Inverse 0 208 0 863 0 800 0 418 0 195 0 297 Very Inverse 0 090 0 795 0 100 1 288 7 958 0 165 Extremely Inverse 0 004 0 638 0 620 1 787 0 246 0 092 R T 3 p c Schneider 61 Protection Functions General Tripping Curves Setting of Inverse Definite Minimum Time Tripping Curves Time Delay T or TMS Factor The time delays of current Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT tr
245. r device with a master Modbus communication channel Note Sepam relays are always a slave station There are two communication interface types m Communication interfaces to connect Sepam relays to a single network o ACE9492 for connection to a 2 wire RS485 network o ACE959 for connection to a 4 wire RS485 network o ACE937 for connection to a fiber optic star network m Communication interfaces to connect Sepam relays to S LAN or E LAN networks o ACE969TP for connection to One 2 wire RS485 Modbus S LAN supervision communication network One 2 wire RS485 E LAN engineering communication network o ACE969FO for connection to One fiber optic Modbus S LAN supervision communication network One 2 wire RS485 E LAN engineering communication network Data Available The data available depend on the type of Sepam relay Measurement Readout m Phase and ground fault current m Peak demand phase current m Tripping current m Cumulative breaking current m Phase to phase phase to neutral and residual voltage m Frequency m Temperature m Thermal capacity used m Starts per hour and block starting time m Running hours counter m Motor starting current and time m Operating time before overload tripping m Waiting time after tripping m Operating time and number of operations m Circuit breaker charging time Program Logic Data Readout m A table of 64 pre assigned remote indications TS depending on the type of Sepam relay enables
246. r with the MSA141 option Characteristics Range 22 F to 392 F 30 C to 200 C Accuracy 1 4 24 F 2 F 2 12 F 1 C from 68 284 F Resolution 1 F 1 C Refresh Interval 5 s Typical 1 At V p in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Note The accuracy derating depends on the wiring For more information see MET1482 Temperature Sensor Module on page 151 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Electric MT10180 Network Diagnosis Tripping Current amp Functions Negative Sequence Unbalance i Tripping Current Operation This function gives the RMS value of currents at the time of the last trip based on the fundamental component m TRIP la Phase a current m TRIP Ib Phase b current m TRIP Ic Phase c current tripping command m TRIP Ir Residual current p 30 ms a This measurement is defined as the maximum RMS value measured during a 30 ms gt interval after the activation of the tripping contact on output O1 The tripping current Tr i t values are saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced user machine interface UMI by pressing the key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link Characteristics Measurement Range Phase Current 0 1 40 IN 1 Residual Current 0 1 20 Inr Unit A or kA Accur
247. racteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Only CSH120 CSH200 and CSH280 zero sequence CT can be used for direct residual current measurement Other residual current sensors require the use of an intermediate device CSH30 ACE990 or CCA634 m Install the zero sequence CT on insulated cables m Cables with a rated voltage of more than 1000 V must also have a grounded shielding Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury CSH120 and CSH200 Zero Sequence CT Assembly Group the MV cable or cables in the middle of the zero sequence CT Use non conductive binding to hold the cables Remember to insert the 3 medium voltage cable shielding grounding cables through the zero sequence CT DE51678 E40465 Assembly on Mounting Plate Assembly on MV Cables A CAUTION Connection HAZARD OF NON OPERATION Do not connect the secondary circuit of the CSH zero sequence CT to ground This connection is made in the Sepam relay Failure to follow this instruction can cause the Sepam relay to operate incorrectly Connection to Sepam Series 20 and Sepam Series 40 To residual current Ir input on connector A terminals 19 and 18 s
248. ration Time at 10 Is0 93 5 5 With CSH Sensor CT or Zero Sequence CT ACE990 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 In0 IsO x 100 sum of CTs 17 5 Setting DT inst 50 mss Ts 300 s IDMT 9 100 ms lt Ts 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Accuracy 2 DT 2 96 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer Hold Delay T1 Definite Time Timer Hold 0 0 05 300 s Inverse Definite Minimum Time 4 0 5 300 s Characteristic Times Operation Time Pick Up 35 ms at 2 Isr typically 25 ms Confirmed Instantaneous m Inst lt 50 ms at 2 Isr for Isr gt 0 3 INr typically 35 ms m Inst lt 70 ms at 2 Isr for Isr lt 0 3 INr typically 50 ms Overshoot Time Reset Time 35 ms 40 ms for T1 2 0 Schneider D Electric 63230 216 208C1 51 Protection Functions Phase to Phase Overvoltage ANSI Code 59P Operation This protection is three phase m t picks up when one of the phase to phase voltages concerned is greater than the Vs set point m The protection includes a definite time delay Block Diagram g Vab T 9 Time Delayed Vbc V Vs Output Vca Pick Up Signal Characteristics VLS Set Point Setting 50 150 V p 2 Accuracy 1 2 or 0 005 Vi p Resolution 1 Drop Out Pick Up Ratio 97 1 Time Delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Characteristi
249. read n words function 3 The function code field may have the following values m 01h to 99h BCD encoding for the list of protection functions F01 to F99 m The relay number field is used for protection o Indicates the relay involved O Varies from 1 to N N being the maximum number of relays available in the Sepam and may never be equal to 0 Exception Reply In addition to the usual cases Sepam realys can send type 07 exception replies not acknowledged if m Another remote reading or setting request is being processed W The remote setting function is blocked 63230 216 208C1 107 D Electric Modbus Communication Access to Remote Settings Reply Frame The reply sent back by the Sepam relay is the same as the remote reading reply frame It fits into a zone containing a maximum of 125 words at the address 2000h and is composed of the effective settings of the function following a semantic check 2000h 207Ch B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 BOS BO2 BO1 BOO Function Code Relay Number Settings This zone is read by a read n words operation function 3 at the address 2000h The length of the exchange may unclude m The first word only validity test m The maximum size of the reply zone 125 words m The usable size of the reply zone determined by the function being addressed n Reading must always begin at the first word in the
250. reply The Modbus master must be able to disregard this echo Otherwise it is impossible to create a Modbus fiber optic ring Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric PE50585 PE50586 Modbus Communication MODBUS advanced parameters Remote Control Mode C Select Before perate Ok Cancel SFT2841 Modbus Advanced Parameters Window Communication configuration Communication interface ACE 363TP r S LAN port Communication protocol MODBUS v Sepam address 1 Speed 19200 Bauds Parity Even v Advanced parameters gt gt gt rE LAN port Sepam address 1 Speed 38400 v Bauds Parity Odd SFT2841 Communication Configuration Window for ACE969FO 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Ok Cancel Schneider Configuring the Communication Interfaces Configuring Modbus Advanced Parameters The Sepam relay remote control mode is selected from the MODBUS Advanced Parameters window Default Value Direct Authorized ValueS Direct or Select Before Operate SBO Mode Advanced Parameters Remote Control Mode Direct Remote Control Command The remote control command is executed when it is written in the remote control word The program logic resets it to zero after the remote control command is acknowledged Confirmed Select Before Operate SBO Remote Control Command In this mode remote control command involve two steps
251. rity o None o Even o Odd m Handshake o None n RTS o RTS CTS m Time out o 100 3000 ms m Number of retries D 1 2 0r3 Link Via Ethernet TCP IP ConSepem TCA The Sepam units are connected to an RS485 multidrop network over an Ethernet een Modbus TCP IP gateway e g EGX gateway C Serial Mae 244 Configuration of the Modbus TCP IP Gateway d See the setup manual for the gateway used In general the gateway should be guum assigned an IP address The configuration parameters for the gateway s RS485 a interface must be defined in accordance with the Sepam communication interface UU configuration EXE m Speed Te 5 m o 4800 Baud Redstone 2 o 9600 Baud o 19200 Baud a 38400 Baud Configuration Window for the Ethernet TCP IP m Character Format Communication Network o 8 data bits 1 stop bit parity none even odd Configuration of Communication on SFT2841 When configuring a Sepam network on SFT2841 the following communication parameters must be defined m P address of the remote Modbus TCP IP gateway m Time out o 100 3000 ms A time out of between 800 ms and 1000 ms is sufficient in most installations Communication via the TCP IP gateway may however be slowed if other applications require Modbus TCP IP access at the same time The time out value should then be increased 2 3 seconds m Number of retries D 1 2 0r3 Note 1 SFT2841 uses the Modbus TCP IP communication protocol Although commun
252. s 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 0 10 mA Minimum Value Current Scaling No Data Input Checking Maximum Value 600 Q Including Wiring 0 5 Load Impedance Accuracy Phase and Residual Currents 0 1A 7 Phase to Neutral and phase to Phase Voltages 1 V u Frequency 0 01 Hz L L Thermal Capacity Used 196 L Temperatures 1 F 1 C L 7 Active Power 0 1 kW a Reactive Power 0 1 kvar L L Apparent Power 0 1 kVA u L Power Factor 0 01 L Remote Setting via Communication Link L 7 Description and Dimensions A Terminal block for analog output RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord RJ45 socket to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord according to application Grounding terminal 1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor Rc to be set to m i if the module is not the last interlinked module default position m Rc if the module is the last interlinked module Connection Connection of the Grounding Terminal By tinned copper braid with cross section gt 0 0093 in 6 mm AWG 10 or cable with cross section gt 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 and length x 7 9 in 200 mm equipped with a 0 16 in 4 mm ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm or 19 5 Ib in Connection of Analog Output to Screw Type Connector m 1 wire with cross section 0 00003 0 0039 in 0 2 2 5 mm
253. s 20 for simple applications m Sepam Series 40 for DE51730 PE50465 demanding applications m Sepam Series 80 for custom applications Characteristics m 10 Logic Inputs m 8 Relay Outputs m 1 Communication Port m 8 Temperature Sensor Inputs All information relating to the Sepam range can be found in the following documents m Sepam Catalog 63230 216 238 DE51731 BE m Sepam Series 20 User s Manual Sepam Series 40 PE50465 DE51732 63230 216 208 For Demanding Applications User s Manual 63230 216 231 m Sepam series 80 Operation Manual m 23 Relay Outputs m Logic Equation Editor m Sepam Series 40 User s Manual Characteristics m 10 Logic Inputs m 8 Relay Outputs m Logic Equation Editor m 1 Communication Port m 16 Temperature Sensor Inputs 63230 216 229 m 2 Communication Ports 63230 216 219 m Sepam Series 80 Reference Manual m Sepam DNP3 Communication SepamSeres80 8 ees Series 80 User s Manual 63230 216 236 GOTIOUSTOIOIEDHIIGHHODS for Multimaster or Redundant Architecture PE50463 DE51733 m Sepam Series 80 Modbus Communication 42 Logic User s Manual 63230 216 237 Eu ee Sensor Inputs Removable Memory Cartridge with Parameters and Settings for Quick Return to Service After Replacement Battery for Storing Logs and Recording Data
254. s Reserved Schneider Access to Remote Settings Remote Setting Data That Can be Remotely Set Writing of the settings of all the protection functions may be accessed remotely Exchange Principle Remote setting is allowed for Sepam units and is carried out for a given function relay by relay The remote setting takes place in two steps m The master indicates the function code and relay number followed by the values of all the settings in the a write request frame the request is acknowledged to free the network m Then the master reads a reply zone to find the required information by means of a reply frame a reply zone designed for checking that the settings have been processed o Each function has its own particular reply zone contents o The contents are same as those of the reply frame It is necessary to make all the settings for the function concerned to use remote setting even if some of the settings have not changed Request Frame The request is made by the master using a write n words function 16 operation at the address 2100h The zone to be written contains a maximum of 125 words the values of all the settings and it consists of the following 2100h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 BO7 BO6 BO5 B04 BO3 BO2 BO1 BOO Function Code Relay Number Settings The content of the address 2100h may be read using a
255. s V3 Vu p v3 Vbn MOIS s eere Residual Voltage Value Secondary Injection of VT VT Primary Rated Obtained by 3 phase VT Rated Phase to Neutral Phase to Neutral Voltage Vi p Vr o voltage Vi s V3 v3 Residual Roltage Secondary Injection of Residual Voltage Input Connection Voltage V s V3 V p V3 if Vj s V3 VT VES na o Vi p if Vj s 3 VT Tests Performed ONE E E E E Signatures BY EE E ere Comments 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 208C1 203 Electric MT10587 Commissioning Sepam has a large number of self tests that are carried out in the base unit and in additional modules These tests exist to m Detect failures that can lead to nuisance tripping or the failure to trip when a fault occurs m Put Sepam in the fail safe position to avoid user errors m Notify the operator that a maintenance operation is required The Sepam Diagnosis screen of the SFT2841 software provides access to data on the status of the base unit and optional modules Control wat EE E39 TTE CT tasan tan CT m DW Ne men au von comes d Ne Seon date ans ime Dina u optcnai modes d ne MESS 40 masse tees MEAN C aio ope moda tamea dames Mente dorer nt ene CIE From panei UM messe a SFT2841 Sepam Diagnosis Screen Mow MOS tepen bae D Wim un a AG HE A CAUTION HAZARD OF DAMAGE TO SEPAM m Do no
256. s have been run if the fault still persists a final trip command is given a message is displayed and closing is locked out until acknowledged according to the parameter setting of the protection function m Closing on a fault olf the circuit breaker closes on a fault or if the fault appears before the end of the lockout time delay the recloser is blocked Block Recloser Conditions The recloser is blocked in the following conditions m Voluntary open or close command m Recloser put out of service m Receipt of a lockout command on the lockout logic input 126 m Appearance of a switchgear related fault such as trip circuit fault or control fault m Opening of the circuit breaker by external tripping via inputs 121 122 or 123 Characteristics Reclosing Shots Setting Number of Shots 1 4 Activation of Shot 1 1 Overcurrent 1 Overcurrent 2 Ground Fault 1 Ground Fault 2 Inst Delayed Inactive Activation of Shots 2 3 and 4 1 Overcurrent 1 Overcurent2 Ground Fault 1 Ground Fault 2 Inst Delayed Inactive Time Delays Memory Time Delay 0 05 300 s Isolation Time Delay Shot 1 shota 0 05 300 s Shot 3 Shot 4 Lockout Time Delay 0 05 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit 1 If a protection function that is inactive in relation to the recloser leads to circuit breaker opening the recloser is blocked 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 5
257. s port can accept residually connected phase CT and therefore measure positive negative and zero sequence components This port can also accept a zero sequence CT which measures only true zero sequence no positive or negative sequence So the port name INr is just that a port name What kind of current positive negative or zero sequence depends on the type of CT used 10 63230 216 208C1 Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Metering Functions Characteristics Metering Phase Current 0 1 40 IN 2 1 Residual Current Calculated 0 1 40 IN 1 7 Measured 0 1 20 INr 1 Demand Current 0 1 40 IN 1 Peak Demand Current 0 1 40 IN 1 o Phase to Phase Voltage 0 05 1 2 Vp 1 Phase to Neutral Voltage 0 05 1 2 V p 1 Residual Voltage 0 015 3 Vip 1 Positive Sequence Voltage 0 05 1 2 Vip 5 Frequency Sepam Series 20 Relay 50 5 Hz or 60 5 Hz 0 05 Hz Temperature 22 to 4392 F 30 to 200 C 1 C from 20 140 C Network Diagnosis Assistance Phase Tripping Current 0 1 40 IN 5 o Ground Fault Tripping Current 0 1 20 INr 5 o Negative Sequence Unbalance 10 500 of lg 2 Disturbance Recording Machine Operating Assistance Thermal Capacity Used 0 800 1 Hu 10076 for Phase lg Remaining Operating Time Before Overload Tripping 0 999 min x1 min Waiting Time After Overload Tripping 0 999 mi
258. s with 12 Distributed Supply Operating Temperature 23 131 F 5 to 55 C 60255 22 4 Fast Transient Bursts 5 ns 4 kV with Capacitive Tie Breaker in Common Mode 2 kV with Direct Tie Breaker in Common Mode 1 kV with Direct Tie Breaker in Differential Mode 1 kV Common Mode 0 5 kV Differential Mode 3 kV Common Mode 1 kV Differential Mode 1 MHz Damped Oscillating Wave 60255 22 1 1 2 50 us Impulse Waves 60255 5 Schneider 168 63230 216 208C1 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved D Electric DE80039 DE51670 Installation ay 4 13 s Oo 85 105 1 77 45 2 56 65 Male 9 Pin Sub D Connector Supplied with the ACE919 ACE919 bel RS485 RS485 PhN V V L L Le TET Fl BB 3171915 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS485 RS485 Converters Description and Dimensions A Terminal block for 2 wire RS485 link without distributed power supply Female 9 pin sub D connector to connect to the 2 wire RS485 network with distributed power supply 1 screw type male 9 pin sub D connector is supplied with the converter Power supply terminal block 1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch 12 V DC or 24 V DC 2 Protection fuse unlocked by a 1 4 turn 3 ON OFF LED on if ACE919 is energized 4 SW parameter setti
259. soidal AC voltage generator o 50 or 60 Hz frequency according to the country o Single phase type adjustable from 0 to 150 Vrms o With connector suited to the built in test terminal box in the voltage input connection diagram m DC voltage generator n Adjustable from 24 250 V DC o For adaptation to the voltage level of the input being tested O With electric cord and clamps wire grip or touch probes Metering Devices m 1 ammeter 0 to 50 Arms W 1 voltmeter O to 150 Vrms Computer Equipment m PC with minimum configuration o Microsoft Windows 98 XP 2000 NT 4 0 o 133 MHz Pentium processor o 64 MB of RAM or 32 MB with Windows 98 o 64 MB free on hard disk o CD ROM drive m SFT2841 software m CCA783 serial connection cord between the PC and the Sepam relay Documents m Complete connection diagram of Sepam and additional modules with o Phase current input connection to corresponding CTs via the test terminal box o Residual current input connection o Phase voltage input connection to corresponding VTs via the test terminal box o Residual voltage input connection to corresponding VTs via the test terminal box o Logic input and output connection o Temperature sensor connection o Analog output connection m Hardware BOMs and installation rules m All Sepam parameter and protection settings available in paper format Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Electric Commissioning 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights
260. t open the Sepam base unit m Do not attempt to repair any components in the Sepam range either in the base unit or an accessory Failure to follow these instructions can cause equipment damage 204 63230 216 208C1 Schneider Maintenance Shutdown of the Base Unit in Fail Safe Position The base unit goes into the fail safe position in the following conditions m Detection of an internal failure by the self tests m Sensor interface connector missing CCA630 CCA634 CCA670 or CCT640 according to the type of application m No connection of one of the 3 LPCT sensors to the CCA670 connectors L1 L2 L3 m MES module configured but missing The fail safe position is conveyed by m ONLED on RK LED on the base unit steadily on m O4 watchdog relay in fault position m Output relays dropped out m All protection units blocked m Display showing fault message RQ oi L J LED on DSM303 module remote advanced UMI option flashing Downgraded Operation The base unit is in working order all the protection functions activated are operational and indicates that one of the optional modules such as DSM303 MET1482 or MSA141 is faulty or else that a module is configured but not connected According to the model this operating mode is conveyed by m Sepam with integrated advanced UMI UD base o ON LED on o A LED on the base unit flashing including when the display is out of order off o ey LED o
261. the appearance of a not synchronous event Likewise if Sepam is in correct time and synchronous status the failure to receive a synchronization pulse for 200 seconds generates the appearance of a not synchronous event 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 105 lectric Modbus Communication 106 63230 216 208C1 Access to Remote Settings Reading of Remote Settings Remote Reading Settings Accessible For Remote Reading Reading of the settings of all the protection functions may be accessed remotely Exchange Principle Remote reading of settings takes place in two steps m The master indicates the code of the function for which it wishes to know the settings by means of a request frame the request is acknowledged in the Modbus sense of the term to free the network m The master then reads a reply zone to find the required information by means of a reply frame Each function has its own particular reply zone contents The time needed between the request and the reply is linked to the Sepam relay s low priority shot time and may vary by several tens to several hundreds of milliseconds Request Frame The request is made by the master using a write word function 6 or 16 operation at the address 2080h of a 1 word frame consisting of the following 2080h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 BO8 B07 B06 BOS B04 BOS BO2 BO1 BOO
262. the Vs set point m Has 3 independent outputs available for the control matrix m Is operational if the VTs connected are Van Vbn Vcn or Vab Vbc with a measurement of Vr Block Diagram g Van Van Vs PF Time Delayed Output T 9 Vbn Vbn Vs gt Time Delayed Output Vcn Vcn Vs gt Time Delayed Output Pick Up Signal Characteristics Vs Set Point Setting 5 100 Vp Accuracy 1 2 or 0 005 Vip Resolution 1 Drop Out Pick Up Ratio 103 2 5 Time Delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution Characteristic Operation Time Times 10 ms or 1 Digit Pick Up 35 ms Typically 25 ms Overshoot Time lt 35 ms Reset Time lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider D Electric 63230 216 208C1 31 Protection Functions ANSI Code 37 Phase Undercurrent Operation Block Diagram This single phase protection m Picks up when phase 1 current drops below the 5 la Is To Is set point 8 Time Delayed m Is inactive when the current is less than 10 of lp Output m Is insensitive to current drops breaking from circuit Pick Up breaker tripping Signal m includes a definite time delay T 6 i 5 At Characteristics Is Set Point E Setting 15 lg s Is 100 lg by steps of 1 Accuracy 1 5 Ls Pick Up Drop Out Ratio 106
263. the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable Ro Powar Supply o The network cable must be stripped Network 24V DC o The cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp 1 Distributed power supply with separate wiring or included in 8 amp The interface is to be connected to connector on the base unit using a the shielded cable 3 pairs 9 8 ft 3 m CCA612 cord green fittings 2 Terminal block for connection of the distributed power m The interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply module m The ACE959 can be connected to a separate distributed power supply not Note The shield connection should be grounded at only one included in shielded cable end of the serial daisy chain a Terminal block D is used to connect the distributed power supply module A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Check that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Se 63230 216 208C1 159 ectric PE50024 DE80037 DE51666 Installation ACE937 Fiber Optic Connection Interface
264. ting is encoded as follows 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 The tripping curve setting is encoded as follows 0 Definite 1 Standard Inverse Time 9 IEC VIT 2 Long Time Inverse 10 2 IEC EIT C 3 Very Inverse Time 11 2 IEEE Mod Inverse 4 Extremely Inverse Time 12 IEEE Very Inverse 5 Ultra Inverse Time 13 2 IEEE Extr Inverse 6 RI 14 IAC Inverse 7 IEC SIT A 15 IAC Very Inverse 8 IEC LTI B 16 IAC Extr Inverse 8 The setting of the timer hold curve is encoded as follows 0 Definite Time DT 1 Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT 4 The H2 restraint variable is encoded as follows 0 H2 Restraint 1 No H2 Restraint 5 The tripping curve setting is 0 DT 1 IDMT The negative sequence factor is 0 None 0 1 Low 2 25 2 Average 4 5 3 High 9 7 Acknowledgment of the ambient temperature is encoded as follows 0 No 1 Yes Not Used 8 The blocking input setting is encoded as follows 0 No Blocking 1 Block Recloser by Logic Input 126 Not Used The activation mode of each of the shots is encoded as follows Correspondence between bit position and protection according to the table below Bit Activation By Inst O C 1 Time Delayed O C 1 Inst O C 2 Time Delayed O C 2 Inst E F 1 Time Delayed E F 1 Inst E F 2 NO P m o Time Delayed E F 2 The bit status is encoded as follows 0 No activation by the protection
265. ting the wires connected to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector short circuit the current transformer secondary circuits Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Schneider 63230 216 208C1 135 D Electric MT10490 DE80068 Installation Bridging of Terminals Bridging of Terminals 1 2 3 and 9 1 2 and 3 A CAUTION HAZARD OF IMPROPER OPERATION Do not use a CCA634 and residual current input Ir on connector A terminals 18 and 19 Even if it is not connected to a sensor a CCA634 will disturb input 10 on connector A Failure to follow this instruction can cause equipment damage 136 63230 216 208C1 Schneider D Electric 1 A 5 A Current Transformers Connecting and Assembling the CCA630 Connector 1 Open the 2 side shields to access the connection terminals Remove the shields if necessary to make wiring easier If removed they must be replaced after wiring 2 If necessary remove the bridging strap linking terminals 1 2 and 3 supplied with CCA630 3 Connect the wires using 0 16 in 4 mm ring lugs and check the tightness of the 6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits The connector accommodates wires with cross sections of 0 0023 0 0093 in 1 5 6 mm AWG 16 10 4 Close the side shields 5 Plug the connector into the 9 pin inlet on the rear panel item B 6 Tighten the 2 CCA630 connector fastening screws o
266. tions 22 63230 216 208C1 Number of Starts Before Blocking amp Block Start Time Delay Number of Starts Before Blocking Operation The number of starts allowed before blocking is calculated by the number of starts protection function and depends on the thermal state of the motor Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced user machine interface UMI by pressing the key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link Resetting to zero The number of starts counters may be reset to zero as follows after the entry of a password u m On the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the Eu key m On the display of a PC with the SFT2844 software installed Characteristics Measurement Range 0 60 Unit None Display Format 3 Significant Digits Resolution 1 Refresh Interval 1 s Typical Block Start Time Delay Operation The time delay is calculated by the number of starts protection function If the number of starts protection function indicates that starting is blocked the time given represents the waiting time before starting is allowed Readout The number of starts and waiting time can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced UMI by pressing the amp key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link Characteristics Measureme
267. to go on to the next digit by pressing the amp key Do not use characters other than numbers 0 to 9 for each of the 4 digits When the password for your qualification level is entered press the M key to position the cursor on the Apply box Press the eb key again to confirm When Sepam is in protection setting mode a key appears at the top of the display When Sepam is in parameter setting mode two keys appear at the top of the display 5051 2f or On MT10817 Trip Cure Threshold 120 A Delay 100 ms Timer Hold 4 Cure Delay 0 ms Access to the protection setting or parameter setting modes is disabled m By pressing the key m Automatically if no keys are activated for more than 5 minutes 188 63230 216 208C1 Advanced UMI Data Entry Principles Modification of Passwords Only the parameter setting qualification level 2 keys or the SFT2841 allow modification of the passwords Passwords are modified in the general settings screen amp key Loss of Passwords If the factory set passwords have been modified and the latest passwords entered have been irretrievably lost by the user please contact your local after sales service representative Entry of Parameters or Settings Principle Applicable to All Sepam Screens example of phase overcurrent protection m Enter the password m Access the corresponding screen by s
268. transferred the oldest record is altered If a command e g a remote reading or remote setting request is carried out during the transfer of a disturbance recording record the record is not disturbed Time Setting Each record can be dated Time setting of Sepam is described in the Time tagging of events section Transferring Records The transfer requests are made record by record i e one configuration file and one data file per record The master sends the commands in order to m Find out the characteristics of the records stored in an identification zone m Read the contents of the different files m Acknowledge each transfer m Re read the identification zone to ensure that the record still appears in the list of records available 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Disturbance Recording Reading the Identification Zone Given the volume of data to be transmitted the master must ensure that there are data to be recovered and prepare the exchanges when necessary The identification zone described below is read by the reading of N words starting at the address 2204h these data are consecutive m 2 reserve words forced to 0 m Size of record configuration files encoded in 1 word m Size of record data files encoded in 1 word m Number of records encoded in 1 word m Date of record most recent encoded in 4 words see format below m Date of record least recent encoded in 4 words see format
269. tric All Rights Reserved Running Hours Counter Operating Time amp Thermal Capacity Used Running Hours Counter Operating Time The counter gives the running total of time during which the protected device motor or transformer has been operating I gt 0 11 The initial counter value may be modified using the SFT2841 software and is saved every 4 hours Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The display of a Sepam relay with an advanced user machine interface UMI by pressing the key m The display of a PC with the SFT2841 software installed m The communication link Characteristics Range 0 655835 Unit hrs Thermal Capacity Used Operation The thermal capacity used is calculated by the thermal protection algorithm and is related to the load This measurement is given as a percentage of the rated thermal capacity Saving of Thermal Capacity Used When the protection unit trips the current thermal capacity used is increased by 10 and saved The saved value is reset to zero when the thermal capacity used has decreased sufficiently and the block start time delay is zero The saved value is used again after a Sepam relay power outage making it possible to restart accounting for the temperature buildup that caused the trip 1 The 10 increase is used to take into account the average temperature buildup of motors when starting Readout The measurements can be accessed via m The displ
270. uccessively pressing the key m Move the cursor by pressing the W key for access to the desired field e g Curve m Press the G key to confirm the choice then select the type of curve by pressing the W or A key and confirm by pressing the em key m Press the V key to reach the following fields up to the Apply box Press the key to confirm the setting Entry of Numerical Values e g current threshold value m Position the cursor on the required field using the P A keys then confirm to go on to the next digit by pressing the amp key mM E m Select the first digit to be entered and set the value by pressing the P or A key choice of 0 9 j m Press the e key to confirm the choice and go on to the following digit The values are entered with 3 significant digits and a period The unit e g A or kA is chosen using the last digit m Press the a key to confirm the entry then press the key for access to the following field m All of the values entered are only effective after the user confirms by selecting the Apply box at the bottom of the screen and presses the key Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Gf Electric Use The Sepam units are delivered with default parameter setting and protection setting according to the type of application These factory settings are also used with the SFT 2841 software for m The creation of new files in disc
271. uit breaker racked out disconnected and open m All the tests are to be performed under operating conditions no wiring or setting changes even temporary changes to facilitate testing are allowed m The SFT2841 parameter setting and operating software is the basic tool for all Sepam users It is especially useful during Sepam commissioning tests O Tests described in this document are based on the use of that tool D The commissioning tests can be performed without the SFT2841 software for Sepam units with advanced UMIs Method For each Sepam m Only carry out the checks suited to the hardware configuration and the functions activated m Use the test sheet provided to record the results of the commissioning tests A comprehensive description of all the tests is given further on m Checking phase current input connections o With 1 A 5 A transformer see p7 25 n With LPCT type current sensor see p 7 26 m Checking the residual current input connection see p7 27 m Checking phase voltage input connections see p7 28 m Checking the residual voltage input connection see p7 29 63230 216 208C1 191 D Electric Commissioning 192 63230 216 208C1 Testing and Metering Equipment Required Generators m Sinusoidal AC current generator o 50 or 60 Hz frequency according to the country o Single phase type adjustable from 0 to 50 Arms o With connector suited to the built in test terminal box in the current input connection diagram m Sinu
272. ult in death serious injury or property damage A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided minor or moderate injury or property damage Important notes Restricted liability Electrical equipment should be serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this manual This document is not intended as an instruction manual for untrained persons Device operation The user is responsible for checking that the rated characteristics of the device are suitable for its application The user is responsible for reading and following the device s operating and installation instructions before attempting to commission or maintain it Failure to follow these instructions can affect device operation and constitute a hazard for people and property Protective grounding The user is responsible for compliance with all the existing international and national electrical codes concerning protective grounding of any device FCC Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and i
273. ult program logic according to the type S20 T20 etc as well as messages for the different LEDs The functions are assigned according to the most frequent use of the unit This parameter setting and or marking can be customized if required using the SFT 2841 software tool m S20 application o Activation of output O2 upon protection tripping o Activation of LEDs according to front panel markings o Watchdog on output O4 n Disturbance recording triggering upon signal pick up m Additional functions for T20 application o Activation of O1 without latching upon tripping of temperature monitoring 1 to 7 o Activation of O1 and LED L9 without latching upon thermal overload tripping m Additional functions for M20 application o Activation of outputs O1 and O2 and LED L9 upon tripping of functions 37 phase undercurrent and 51LR locked rotor o Activation of output O2 upon tripping of function 66 starts per hour n Latching for function 51LR m Complement for S23 T23 applications o All functions except for 49 RMS activate the 50BF protection function in the absence of circuit breaker control Schneider 63230 216 208C1 189 D Electric Use B21 and B22 Applications Hardware configuration Identification Sepam xxxx Model UX without fixed advanced UMI MES module Absent MET module Absent MSA module Absent DSM module Present ACE module Absent Output Parameter Setting m Outputs used 01 04 m N O Output Contacts
274. urements to facilitate fault analysis on N bsi b gt 5i b 5IN b 5IN ext Y0off lon Tip MT10286 Tripla 162A Triplb 161A Triplc 250A Triplr 250A Key eo on N Bst b gt 5i b 5IN b SIN ext Ooff lon Tip The alarms key is used to consult the 16 most recent alarms that have not yet been cleared e o o o J o o o MT10287 O Ir FAULT i 184 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Use Advanced UMI White Keys for Current Operation Key Era The reset key resets the Sepam relay switches off LEDs and restores the protection units to pre fault conditions after the disappearance of faults MT10906 The alarm messages are not erased Key When an alarm is present on the Sepam display the clear key is used to return to the screen that was present prior to the appearance of the alarm or to a less recent unacknowledged alarm This key does not reset the Sepam relay on LAS b51 e MT10833 In the metering diagnosis or alarm menus the clear key can be used to reset the average currents peak demand currents running hours counter and alarm stack when they are shown on the display Key b51 Press the lamp test key for 5 seconds to start an LED se 3 and display test sequence e E MT10829 Note When an alarm is present the lamp test key is disabled 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Scbneider Electri
275. urrent Sensors Function Low Power Current Transducer LPCT type sensors are voltage output sensors that are compliant with the IEC 60044 8 standard The Schneider Electric range of LPCT includes the following sensors m CLP1 m CLP2 m CLP3 m TLP160 m TLP190 CCA670 CCA671 Connector Function The 3 LPCT sensors are connected to the CCA670 or CCA671 connector on the rear panel of Sepam relays fewer than 3 sensors causes the Sepam relay to go into fail safe position The two CCA670 and CCA671 interface connectors serve the same purpose with the difference being the position of the LPCT sensor plugs m CCA670 Lateral plugs for Sepam Series 20 and Sepam Series 40 m CCA671 Radial plugs for Sepam Series 80 Description m 3 RJ45 plugs to connect LPCT sensors m 3 blocks of microswitches to set the CCA670 CCA671 to the rated phase current value m Microswitch setting selected rated current equivalency table 2 IN values per position m 9 pin sub D connector to connect test equipment ACE917 for direct connector or via CCA613 Rating of CCA670 CCA671 Connectors The CCA670 CCA671 connector must be rated to the rated primary current IN measured by the LPCT sensors IN is the current value that corresponds to the rated secondary current of 22 5 mV The possible settings for IN are 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 and 3150 A The selected IN value should be m Entered as a Se
276. us 2A 2A 2A 2A Current Breaking L R load 2 1 A 0 5A 0 15 A Capacity lt 20 ms p f load gt 0 3 1A Making lt 15 A for 200 ms Capacity Isolation of Enhanced Outputs in Relation to Other isolated Groups 1 Complies with clause 6 7 of standard C37 90 30A 200ms 2000 operations See Technical Characteristics table at the beginning of this manual 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 147 ectric DE52153 DE51683 Installation QQOoOooOoOoOoOoQ aN RADIOS 148 63230 216 208C1 MES114 Module I O 10 Inputs amp 4 Outputs Description D and 3 removable lockable screw type connectors D Connectors for 4 relay outputs o O11 1 control relay output O O12 to O14 3 annunciation relay outputs M Connectors for 4 independent logic inputs 111 to 114 K Connectors for 6 logic inputs n 121 1 independent logic input o 122 to 126 5 common point logic inputs Also in the diagram to the left X 25 pin sub D connector to connect the module to the base unit Y Voltage selector switch for MES114E and MES114F module inputs to be set to OV DC for DC voltage inputs default setting o V AC for AC voltage inputs Z Label to be filled in to indicate the chosen parameter setting for MES114E and MES114F input voltages The parameter setting status can be accessed in the Sepam Diagnosis screen of the SFT2841 software
277. utputs must be adapted to fit the control and monitoring functions used The number of logic outputs in a Sepam Series 20 relay four outputs included standard can be expanded by adding a MES114 module with an additional ten inputs and four outputs After selecting the MES114 type required by an application the logic inputs must be assigned to functions 68 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Control and Monitoring Definition of Symbols Functions The symbols used in the different block Pulse Mode Operation diagrams describing the control o On Pulse and monitoring functions are defined Used to create a short duration pulse 1 cycle each time a signal appears on this page Ei i Logic Functions m OR x I x y s z S Equation s x y z DE50675 m Off Pulse m AND Used to create a short duration pulse 1 cycle each time a signal disappears z Equation s x y z m Exclusive XOR J Il _ Ep Zz DE50676 DE50677 Note the disappearance of a signal may be caused by an auxiliary power failure s 1 if one and only one input is set to 1 s 1ifx y z 1 Bistable Functions Bistable functions may be used to store values m Complement s b These functions may use the complement of one or more input values i r o Equation S x S 1 if x 0 I I l Delay Timers r Two types of delay timers m On delay timer
278. w shows how to determine the time delay setting for the breaker failure function m Overcurrent protection setting T inst m Circuit breaker operating time 60 ms m Auxiliary relay operating time to open upstream circuit breakers 10 ms Fault 3 i Clearing of Fault a Without Breaker Failure Rising Time Output 50 9 Sepam Output Relay 40 ms Circuit Breaker Opening Time margin Overshoot Time 30MS Sepam Output Relay Time Delay T of the 50BF Protection Function with 20 ms margin 4 T 210 60 20 30 120 ms Fault Clearance Time 40 120 10 10 60 240 ms 15 ms The time delay for the breaker failure function is the sum of the following times m Rise time for the Sepam O1 output relay 10 ms m Circuit breaker opening time 60 ms m Overshoot time for the breaker failure function 30 ms m To avoid nuisance tripping by the upstream breakers select a margin of approximately 20 ms This gives a time delay of T 120 ms Characteristics Is Set Point Setting 0 2 2 IN Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 0 1A Drop Out Pick Up Ratio 87 5 10 Time Delay T Setting 0 05 to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 0 ms to 15 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 Digit Characteristic Times Overshoot Time 30 ms Taking into Account the Circuit Breaker Position Setting With Without Choice of Protection Functions that Activate the 50BF Protection in the Absence of Circuit Breaker Co
279. w these instructions will result in death or serious injury 120 63230 216 208C1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Installation We recommend that you follow the instructions given in this document for quick correct installation of your Sepam unit m Equipment Identification m Assembly m Connection of Inputs Current Voltage and Sensors m Connection of Power Supply m Checking prior to Commissioning 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Precautions Handling Transport and Storage Sepam Relay in Its Original Packaging Transport Sepam relays can be shipped to any destination by all usual means of transport without taking additional precautions Handling Sepam relays can be handled without any particular care and can even withstand being dropped by a person standing at floor level Storage Sepam relays can be stored in its original packaging in an appropriate location for Several years m Temperature between 13 F and 158 F 25 C and 70 C m Humidity lt 90 Periodic yearly checking of the environment and the packaging condition is recommended Once Sepam has been unpacked it should be energized as soon as possible Sepam Installed in a Cubicle Transport Sepam can be transported by all usual means of transport in the customary conditions used for cubicles Storage conditions should be taken into consideration for a long period of transport Handlin
280. will trip earlier below point 2 The risk that a hot motor won t start also exists in this case see Figure 2 in which a lower Sepam relay hot curve would intersect the starting curve with Vj 0 9 VN The Es0 parameter is used to lower the Sepam relay cold curve without moving the hot curve In this example the thermal overload protection should trip after 400 s starting from the cold state The following equation is used to obtain the EsO value t necessary I T I 2 a d u 7 Il Pm u Es Pe IB IB t necessary Tripping time necessary starting from a cold state I processed Equipment current 1 When the machine manufacturer provides both a time constant T1 and the machine hot cold curves use the curves is recommended since they are more accurate 2 The charts containing the numerical values of the Sepam hot curve may be used or the equation of the curve which is given on page 37 63230 216 208C1 39 DE50369 DE50370 Protection Functions In numerical values the following is obtained Es0 4 e 400s FAX L 03085 231 By setting EsO 31 point 2 is moved down to obtain a shorter tripping time compatible with the motor s thermal resistance when cold see Figure 3 Note A setting EsO 100 therefore means that the hot and cold curves are the same Figure 2 Hot Cold Curves Not Compatible with the Motor s Thermal Resistance Time Before Tripping s 513 400 100 A Se
281. word in the zone function code and relay number may have the following values m xxyy O Function code xx different from 00 and FFh o Relay number yy different from FFh The settings are available and validated The word is a copy of the request frame The zone contents remain valid until the next request is made The other word are not significant m FFFFh H The request frame has been processed but the results in the reply frame are not yet available H It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading H The other words are not significant m xxFFh o With function code xx different from 00 and FFh H The function for which the remote reading request has been made is not valid a The function is not included in the particular Sepam or remote reading of it is not authorized refer to the list of functions which accommodate remote reading of settings Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric Modbus Communication A CAUTION RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION m The device must only be configured and set by qualified personnel using the results of the installation protection system study m During commissioning of the installation and following any modification check that the Sepam relay configuration and protection function settings are consistent with the results of this study Failure to follow these instructions may result in equipment damage 2007 Schneider Electric All Right
282. x and via the remote indication TS43 Block Diagram 1 111 112 DE52238 Trip Circuit Fault 1 With MES option Note The function is activated if inputs 111 and 112 are set respectively as circuit breaker open position and circuit breaker closed position Open and Close Supervision Following a circuit breaker open or close command the system checks whether after a 2 seconds time delay the circuit breaker has actually changed status If the circuit breaker status does not match the last command sent a Control Fault message and remote indication TS45 are generated Schneider 63230 216 208C1 73 D Electric Circuit Breaker Contactor Control AC Feeder 3 Line Typical Control and Monitoring Functions SEPAM SERIES 20 40 AC FEEDER 3 LINE Typical il 0 DU 0 LU UJ Uu W 2VT s 3VT s Bs A L I T 7 11 Sepam 11 Sepam H H 11 Sepam 11 Sepam 5 SER 20 SER 40 PowerLogic SER 20 SER 40 PowerLogic B21 or 22 ALL CM or PM B21 or 22 ALL CM or PM I pnus ae E mern 1 Test ipee eee a em Bea seruum Wo 11 1 Sw t Ug Ex H i o1 u B1 Et i Bi El pog 1 11 1 h n S EN Ip el d B2 I E3 E I 11 ao t OF m I 11 u 1 B3 ugs 1 B3 i E2 E 1 11 u D 67 Trip Dir 4 1 HN with Bus B4 E2 B4 E3 EN selected and o n i i On m
283. ximum Diameter um Aperture Attenuation Power Available Fiber Length NA dBm km dBm 50 125 0 2 2 7 5 6 2300 ft 700 m 62 5 125 0 275 3 2 9 4 5900 ft 1800 m 100 140 0 3 4 14 9 9200 ft 2800 m 200 HCS 0 37 6 19 2 8500 ft 2600 m 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 208C1 157 ectric Installation ACE9492 2 wire RS485 Network Interface Function The ACE9492 interface performs 2 functions m Electrical interface between the Sepam relay and a 2 wire RS485 communication network m Main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with PE50029 a CCA612 cord Characteristics Weight 0 22 Ib 0 1 kg ACE9492 2 Wire RS485 Network Connection Interface Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Operating Temperature 13 to 158 F 25 to 70 C Environmental Characteristics Same Characteristics as Sepam Base Units Standard EIA 2 Wire RS485 Differential Distributed Power Supply External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 Power Consumption 16 mA in Receiving Mode id 40 mA Maximum in Sending Mode Number of Maximum Length with Maximum Length with Sepam Relay Units 12 V DC Power Supply 24 V DC Power Supply 5 1000 ft 320 m 3300 ft 1000 m 10 590 ft 180 m 2500 ft 750 m 20 520 ft 160 m 1500 ft 450 m 25 410 ft 125 m 1200 ft 375 m Description and Dimensions A and Terminal blocks for network cable RJ45 socket to connect the interfac
284. y Sepam The time tagging function assigns a date and precise time to status changes so that they can be accurately classified over time Time tagged data are events that can be processed in the control room by the remote monitoring and control system using the communication protocol for data logging and chronological reports Sepam time tags the following data m Logic inputs m Remote annunciation bits m Information pertaining to Sepam equipment see Sepam check word Time tagging is carried out systematically Chronologi cal sorting of the time tagged events is performed by the remote monitoring and control system Time Tagging Sepam time tagging uses absolute time see section on date and time When an event is detected it is tagged with the absolute time given by Sepam s internal clock All the Sepam internal clocks must be synchronized so as to avoid drifts and all be the same to allow inter Sepam chronological sorting Sepam has two mechanisms for managing its internal clock m Time Setting For initializing or modifying the absolute time A special Modbus message called time message is used to time set each Sepam m Synchronization To avoid Sepam internal clock drifts and ensure inter Sepam synchronization Internal clocks can be synchronized according to two principles n Internal Synchronization Via the communication network without any additional cabling o External Synchronization Via a logic input with a
285. y of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power m Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the m Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Terminals e1 e2 Supply Type Screw Terminals Wiring m Wiring with no fittings o 1 wire with maximum cross section 0 0003 0 0039 in 0 2 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 o 2 wires with maximum cross section 0 0003 0 0016 in 0 2 1 mm gt AWG 24 18 O Stripped length 0 31 0 39 in 8 10 mm m Wiring with fittings o Recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm AWG 16 DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 0 0016 in 1 mm AWG 18 o Cable length 0 32 in 8 2 mm O Stripped length 0 31 in 8 mm amp Protective Ground DES1 Screw Terminal 1 Green yellow wire max length 9 8 ft 3 m and maximum cross section 0 0039 in 2 5 mm AWG 12 9 Functional Ground DE51845 0 16 in 4 mm Ring Lug Grounding braid supplied for connection to cubicle grounding Schneider D Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE52078 DE52165 Installation Power Supply Network B B A A V B B AJA V Ring Connection Rx Tx F x F ACE969FO 2 x Optic Wye Connection
286. y report of each Sepam detected as present is also displayed m Sepam Modbus address m Type of application and Sepam identification m Any alarms present m Any minor major faults present To access parameters settings and operation and maintenance information for a particular Sepam relay click on the icon for that Sepam SFT2841 then establishes a point to point connection with the selected device Schneider 63230 216 208C1 181 D Electric Use UMI on Front Panel Presentation Basic UMI This user machine interface UMI includes m 2 LEDs indicating Sepam relay operating status o Green on LED Device on a Red amp LED device unavailable Initialization phase or detection of internal failure m 9 Yellow LEDs for custom parameters with a standard label with SFT2841 a customized label can be printed on a laser printer nu eb Key for clearing faults and resetting m 1 Connection port for the link with the PC CCA783 cord o The connector is protected by a sliding cover b51 gt 51 lo gt 51N b gt 51N ext Ooff lon Trip MT10817 Fixed or Remote Advanced UMI In addition to the basic UMI functions this version provides m A Graphic LCD Display oe oe o o o o o o o a For the display of measurements parameter protection settings and alarm and operating messages n The number of lines size of characters and 2 symbols are in accordance with the screens and la 1 62A RMS language versions i re a a o The LCD dis

- Power Logic

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents